Owner'S Manual.: The BMW I3 and The BMW I3S

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 286

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®

OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW i3 AND THE BMW i3s.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19


Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
WELCOME TO BMW i.
Owner's Manual.
BMW i3 and BMW i3s.
Thank you for choosing a BMW i.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW i. Also use
the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informa‐
tion on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical fea‐
tures available in your BMW i. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintain‐
ing the value of your BMW i.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature. Your BMW AG wishes you a safe and enjoyable drive.

3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the


Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8

QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 18
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 22
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 25

AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 47
General settings ............................................................................................................. 50
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 62
BMW eDRIVE ................................................................................................................. 64
Safety of the high-voltage system ............................................................................ 67

CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ............................................................................ 88
Transporting children safely ....................................................................................... 96
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 100
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 114
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 129
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 134
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 150
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 154
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 173
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 182
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 193

4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 200
Loading .......................................................................................................................... 204
Increasing the range ................................................................................................... 206

MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ................................................................................................... 212
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 223
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 226
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 228
Under the hood ............................................................................................................ 244
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 246
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 248
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 250
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 252
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 255
Care ................................................................................................................................. 260

REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 268
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 271
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 272

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke


Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US EnglishID5 II/19, 03 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8

7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
NOTES Information

Information
Using this Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Orientation The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
lar topic is by using the index.
played on the Control Display. Additional
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in information, refer to page 62.
the first chapter.
BMW i Driver’s Guide Web
Updates made after the editorial Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
deadline formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in Guide Web can be displayed in any current
the vehicle. browser.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Symbols and displays
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
Symbol Meaning
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center. Precautions that must be followed in
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated order to avoid the possibility of injury
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help


Additional sources of protect the environment.
information "..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
Service center
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
A service center will be glad to answer questions
voice activation system.
at any time.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
Internet activation system.
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance. on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.

8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Information NOTES

Action steps selected optional features or the country-specific


version.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in This also applies to safety-related functions and
the defined order. systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
1. First action step.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
2. Second action step. served.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
Enumerations any questions that you may have about the fea‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ tures and options applicable to your vehicle.
native possibilities are presented as a list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility. Status of the Owner's Manual
▷ Second possibility.
Basic information
Symbols on vehicle components The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
This symbol on a vehicle component icy of constant development that is conceived to
indicates that further information on the ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial


deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of or‐ Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
ange-colored high-voltage components results of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric
shock.
For Your Own Safety

Vehicle features and options Intended use


Heed the following when using the vehicle:
This Owner's Manual describes all models and ▷ Owner's Manual.
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐ ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ stickers.
lustrates features and functions that are not ▷ Technical vehicle data.
available in a vehicle, for example because of the

9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
NOTES Information

▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the use another service facility, BMW recommends
vehicle is driven. use of a facility that performs work such as main‐
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. tenance and repair according to BMW i specifi‐
cations with properly trained personnel, referred
to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified
Warranty
service center or repair shop".
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements
applying in the country of first delivery, also DANGER
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be Improperly performed work, in particular main‐
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ tenance and repair on the high-voltage system
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing and the carbon body as well as accessories ret‐
operating conditions and registration require‐ rofits, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the of injury, fire and danger to life. Have work on
homologation requirements in a certain country the vehicle, in particular maintenance and re‐
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for pair, performed by an authorized BMW i deal‐
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐ er’s service center or another qualified service
ranty is available from a service center. center or repair shop.

Working on the vehicle, maintenance


and repairs Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Warning
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
their use and installation are available from a
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
BMW center.
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐ BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐ cles.
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
another qualified service center or repair shop sories.
only. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
Advanced technology, especially the use of high- with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
performance high-voltage electronics and mod‐ hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
ern materials such as carbon, requires special was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
knowledge when making modifications to and these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
working on the vehicle, as well as customized under all usage conditions.
maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends California Proposition 65 Warning
having changes to and work on the vehicle, es‐ For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
pecially maintenance and repair of the high-volt‐ vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
age system and the carbon body as well as retro‐ warning:
fitting of accessories, done by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center. If you choose to

10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Information NOTES

▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.


Warning ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
bile components and parts, including compo‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
Warranty.
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth Detailed information about these warranties is
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
products of component wear contain or emit Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
chemicals known to the State of California to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ country and continental region in order to deliver
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
known to the State of California to cause can‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and mologation requirements. You should also be
water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash US models.
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
hicle. For more information go to Canadian models.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in damag‐
ing the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
Service and warranty the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
NOTES Information

Data memory This information generally records the state of a


component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
General information ▷ Operating states of system components, for
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they tery status.
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
exchange with each other. Some control units components, for instance lights and brakes.
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. ment of the driving stability control systems.

Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.


be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ The data is required to perform the control unit
cle, in a separate booklet, for example. functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
Personal reference hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle The majority of this data is volatile and is only
identification number. Depending on the country, processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ share of the data is stored event-related in event
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ or fault memories.
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
options to track data collected in the vehicle to ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ance measures, this technical information can be
ConnectedDrive account that is used. read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
Operating data in the vehicle A dealer’s service center or another qualified
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
For example, this includes:
sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ out the data.
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
The data is collected, processed, and used by
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
the relevant organizations in the service network.
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
The data documents technical conditions of the
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
sensor signals. compliance with warranty obligations and quality
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ improvement.
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
stored beyond the operating period. monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
nical information. Information about the vehicle The data from the vehicle can also be used to
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐ check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
quirements events or faults can be stored tem‐ anty.
porarily or permanently.

12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Information NOTES

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
reset when a dealer’s service center or another control elements.
qualified service center or repair shop performs The sound and picture from the mobile device
repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
Data entry and data transfer into the ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
General information general vehicle information. This optimizes the
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
cle and modified or reset at any time. There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
For example, this includes:
to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions.
mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ General information
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
an integrated hands-free system or an connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
integrated navigation system. ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle manufacturer
can be deleted at any time. Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
personal request as part of the use of online are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
lected settings for the use of the services. website. The relevant legal information pertaining
to data protection is provided there too. Personal
Incorporation of mobile devices data may be used to perform online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose.

13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
NOTES Information

Any collection, processing, and use of personal This data can help provide a better understand‐
data above and beyond that needed to provide ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
the services must always be based on a legal injuries occur.
permission, contractual arrangement or consent. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
ception of functions and services required by law tions and no personal data, for instance name,
such as Assist systems. gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
Services from other providers ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
When using online services from other providers, of personally identifying data routinely acquired
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ during a crash investigation.
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
changed during this process. Information on the
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
way in which personal data is collected and used
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
in relation to services from third parties, the
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
the EDR.
tained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification number

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ Front passenger seat
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
The vehicle identification number can be found
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ under a cover under the front passenger seat.
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Information NOTES

Windshield For Canadian customers


Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

The vehicle identification number can also be


found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects


For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ....................................................................................................... 18
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 22
On the road ................................................................................................. 25

17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Entering
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking system

Overview
Buttons on the remote control

Buttons for the central locking system.


1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button with the doors closed.
4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking


Press the button on the remote control. Press the button.

Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐ The vehicle locks automatically after you drive
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ off.
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Panic mode
button on the remote control again to unlock the You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
other vehicle access points. self in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold the button on the re‐ Press the button on the remote control
mote control after unlocking. for at least 3 seconds.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, To switch off the alarm: press any button.
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed. Comfort Access
Locking the vehicle Concept
Press the button on the remote control. The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked. All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.

18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Entering QUICK REFERENCE

The vehicle automatically detects the remote Unlocking the tailgate


control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on


the tailgate.
▷ If carrying the remote control, press the but‐
ton on the tailgate.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely. ▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Locking the vehicle Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.

Displays and control elements


In the vicinity of the steering wheel

Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐


er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.

1 Light switch element


2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Start/Stop button
5 Wipers

19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Indicator/warning lights All around the selector lever

Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is established.

Driver's door
1 Start/Stop button
2 Selector lever
3 Wipers

iDrive

Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
1 Locking/unlocking the vehicle switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller.
2 Exterior mirrors
3 Power windows Controller

All around the iDrive Controller General information


The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.


Press twice: displays all menu items of
1 Controller the main menu.
2 Parking brake Opens the Communication menu.
3 Parking assistance systems
4 Driving Dynamics Control Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for navi‐


gation.

20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Button Function the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
Opens navigation map. phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
Press once: opens the previous dis‐ mirror.
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.

Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Using the voice activation system

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering


wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.

If no other commands are possible, operate the


function via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system


Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.

Help on the voice activation system


▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.

Information on Emergency Requests


Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,

21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Set-up and use


Seats, mirrors, and steering Adjusting the steering wheel
wheel Manual steering wheel adjustment

Manually adjustable seats

1. Fold the lever down.


2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
1 Forward/backward height and angle to suit your seating position.
2 Height 3. Fold the lever back up.
3 Backrest tilt

Infotainment
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Radio

Control elements

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor,
automatic cornering adjustment
3 Folding in and out 1 Changing the entertainment source
2 Sound output on/off, volume
3 Changing the waveband
4 Programmable memory buttons
5 Changing the station/track

22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Navigation destination entry 3. "Mobile devices"


4. "Connect new device"
Entering a destination via address 5. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
State/province
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
1. "Navigation" the Control Display.
2. "Enter address" 6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
3. "State/Province?" phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
4. Move the Controller to the right to select the manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
state from the list. tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
Entering the address on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
The address can be entered in any order. tooth name of the vehicle.

Example: entering the address via the town/city 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
1. "City/Postal code?" must be entered.
2. Enter the town/city. ▷ Compare the control number displayed
The list is narrowed down further with each on the Control Display with the control
entry. number on the display of the device.
3. Select the symbol. Confirm the control number on the device
4. Select a town/city from the list. and on the Control Display.

5. If necessary, enter the street. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
The device is connected and displayed in the
7. If necessary, enter a house number. device list.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house Using the phone
numbers from the list.
Accepting a call
Starting destination guidance Incoming calls can be accepted via iDrive or the
"Start guidance" button on the steering wheel.
If only the town/city was entered: destination
guidance is started to the town/city center. Via iDrive
"Accept"
Connecting a mobile phone
Via the button on the steering wheel
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using Press the button.
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐
structions. Via the instrument cluster
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
1. "My Vehicle"
select: "Accept"
2. "iDrive settings"

23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Dialing a number
1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
Establish the connection via the additional
phone:

1. Press the button.


2. "Call via"

24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
On the road QUICK REFERENCE

On the road
Driving Switching on drive-ready state
1. Close the driver's door.
Drive-ready state 2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
General information Drive-ready state is switched on.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the vehi‐
cle is operational. Displays
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. READY indicates drive-ready
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ state.
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time. When drive-ready state is
Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a switched on, the light on the
running engine in conventional vehicles. Deacti‐ Start/Stop button lights up blue.
vated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching In addition, a signal sounds.
the engine off.
To save battery power when parking, switch off Drive-ready state in detail
drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic
systems/power consumers. Requirements
Drive-ready state is switched off automatically: Driving is possible under the following condi‐
tions:
▷ When you lock the vehicle while low beams
are switched on. ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ If the charge state of the batteries is low.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the ▷ Charging cable is detached.
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
Driving away
with driver's door open and low beams off. 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
After the driver's door is opened or closed or the 2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
driver's safety belt is released, the radio-ready lever in position D or R.
state remains active. 3. Release the parking brake.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive off.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button Accelerator pedal positions
switches standby state on or off.
Drive-ready state is switched on Engaging the gear
when you depress the brake ▷ Interlock: the selector lever position P can be
pedal while pressing the Start/ exited only with drive-ready state engaged.
Stop button.
▷ Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press
on the brake pedal before shifting out of P

25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE On the road

or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be The LED and indicator light go out.
executed. The parking brake is released.
▷ Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove the
charging cable from the vehicle; otherwise, High beams, headlight flasher, turn
the shift command will not be executed. signal, roadside parking light
Engaging N, D, R
High beams, headlight flasher

Turn the selector lever in the desired direction.


Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
The selected gear is displayed on the selector
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
lever.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
Engaging P
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Turn signal

Apply brake and press button P.

Parking brake ▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

Setting ▷ Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance


point.
Pull the switch.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
The LED and indicator light light up. lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
Releasing
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
With drive-ready state switched on: want the turn signal to flash.
Press the switch while pressing on the
brake pedal.

26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Roadside parking light Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.


▷ On: with standby state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance ▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
point in the opposite direction. ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.

Lights and lighting


Brief wipe and switching off
Light functions

Symbol Function

Automatic headlight control.


Cornering light.

Lights off.
Daytime running lights.

Parking lights. Push wiper lever down.


▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
Low beams.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Instrument lighting.

27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Rain sensor Climate control


Activating/deactivating
Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Recirculated-air mode.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution: windows.

Air distribution: upper body re‐


gion.

Air distribution: floor area.

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Defrosts and defogs the win‐
dows.
Cleaning the windshield Rear window defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Button Function Charging and refueling the


AUTO program. vehicle
Automatic recirculated-air con‐ Charging the vehicle
trol AUC/recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual. Connecting


To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐
Controls the air distribution
cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
manually.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
SYNC program.

Defrosts and defogs the win‐


dow.

Rear window defroster.

2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.

3. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug,


if needed.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
5. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug,
and push it in until it engages.

Removing
When the charging process is active and the ve‐
hicle is locked, the charging cable is automati‐
cally locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing
the cable.

29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE On the road

When the charging process is completed, the Refueling


charging cable is automatically unlocked.
If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐ Venting the tank
ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as
from snow, before removing it. a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐
1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is pated before the fuel cap is opened.
locked. The button is located on the driver's floor area.
Charging cable is unlocked. 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas. 2. Press the button to start the pressure
equalization.
Charging process is interrupted.
The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting
can last several minutes.
When tank venting has finished, a message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel
cap is released for opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap
after tank venting, press the button again.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐ If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
ing socket, arrow 2. flap even after pressing the button again, un‐
4. Put the charging socket lid back on. lock the fuel filler flap manually.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐


Fuel cap
gages.
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
open it.
needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
from the port on the charging station as appli‐
cable.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the permanently
installed charging cable in the place provided
for it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Gasoline 4. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.


For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should 5. After approx. 5, minutes, remove the dip stick
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐ similar.
allic additives. 6. Carefully insert the dipstick up to the stop in
Information on the recommended fuel grade can the measuring tube, and pull it back out.
be found in the Owner's Manual. The engine oil level must be between the two
marks of the dipstick.
Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications Providing assistance


Hazard warning flashers

The pressure values for tire sizes approved by


the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type are on the driver's side on the rear door. The button is located in the center console.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure Breakdown assistance


For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the BMW Roadside Assistance
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
Checking the tire inflation pressure
2. "BMW Assist"
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed: 3. "BMW i Roadside Assistance"

▷ At least twice a month. A voice connection is established to BMW


Roadside Assistance.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.

ConnectedDrive
Check engine oil level with dipstick
1. Park the vehicle in a level and safe place with Concierge service
the Range Extender at operating tempera‐
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
ture.
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
2. Switch the engine off. provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
3. Remove the cargo floor panel. hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐

31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
QUICK REFERENCE On the road

cierge service. The Concierge service is part of


the optional BMW Assist Response Center.

1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"

Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.

32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
On the road QUICK REFERENCE

33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 47
General settings ......................................................................................... 50
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 62
BMW eDRIVE ............................................................................................. 64
Safety of the high-voltage system .......................................................... 67

35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle features and options selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows  85 Low beams  129


2 Exterior mirror operation  93
3 Unlocking the hood  78 Automatic headlight control  130
Unlocking the tailgate  79 Daytime running lights  131
With Range Extender: vent fuel tank  223 Cornering light  131
4 Lights High-beam Assistant  131
Light switch  129 Instrument lighting  132

Parking lights  129
5 Left steering column stalk

36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Turn signal  109 Rear window wiper  111

High beams, headlight flasher  109 Clean the rear window  112

High-beam Assistant  131 10 Steering wheel buttons, right


Entertainment source
Roadside parking lights  129

Volume
Onboard Computer  126

Voice activation  47
6 Instrument cluster  114
7 Switch drive-ready state on and Telephone
off  100

8 Selector lever  102 Thumbwheel for selection lists  125

9 Right steering column stalk 11 Horn, entire surface


Wipers  109

12 Adjusting the steering wheel  95


Rain sensor  110 13 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
Cleaning the windshield and head‐ rupt  160
lights  111
Active Cruise Control on/off, inter‐
Rear window wiper in Canadian rupt  154
models  111
Cruise control: to store the speed

Cruise control: to resume the


speed

Active Cruise Control, adjust dis‐


tance

Cruise control rocker switch

37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE Cockpit

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Control Display  40 6 Controller with buttons  42


2 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for 7 Parking brake  107
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ 8 PDC Park Distance Control  163
tion  8
Rearview camera  166
3 Glove compartment  193
Parking assistant  169
4 Climate control  173
9 Driving Dynamics Control  151
5 Hazard warning system  255

Intelligent Safety  142

38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Cockpit AT A GLANCE

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS  256 4 Reading lights  132

2 Glass sunroof, electric  86 5 Interior lights  132

3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger


airbag  137

39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE iDrive

iDrive
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function

or Change between capital and


This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ lower-case letters.
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Insert blank space.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
Use voice activation.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Confirm entry.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
Concept letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
The iDrive combines the functions of many stored in the vehicle.
switches. These functions can be operated via ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
the Controller. which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
Safety information tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.

Warning Activating/deactivating the functions


Operating the integrated information systems Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
and communication devices while driving can box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only menu item activates or deactivates the function.
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ Function is activated.
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the Function is deactivated.
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Status information

General information
Input and display The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters,
numbers and characters.

40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
iDrive AT A GLANCE

Radio symbols Other symbols

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being received. Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched


Telephone symbols off.

Symbol Meaning Encrypted connection not active.

Incoming or outgoing call. Request for the current vehicle posi‐


tion.
Missed call.
Checking the current vehicle position.
Signal strength of cellular network.

Network search. Split screen, split screen display


Cellular network is not available.
General information
The critical charge state of the mobile Additional information, for instance information
phone has been reached. from the Onboard Computer can be displayed in
Roaming is active. several menus on the right side of the split
screen display, referred to as the split screen.
SMS text message received.
The additional information remains visible even
Message received. when switching to another menu on the split
screen.
Reminder.

Sending not possible. Switching on/off


Contacts are being loaded. 1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Entertainment symbols
Selecting the display
Symbol Meaning
The display can be selected in menus which
Music hard disk. support the split screen function.

Bluetooth audio. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
USB audio interface.
2. Press the Controller.
Online Entertainment. 3. Select the desired setting.
WiFi.

41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE iDrive

Specifying the number of displays Safety information


It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split NOTICE
screen is selected. Objects in the area in the front of the Control
2. Press the Controller. Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
3. "Personalize menu"
not place objects in the area in front of the
4. Select the desired setting. Control Display.
5. Move the Controller to the left.

Switching on/off automatically


Control elements The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
Overview In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.

Switching on/off manually


The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.

1. Press the button.


1 Control Display 2. "Turn off control display"
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
the equipment version, with touchpad troller to switch it back on again.

Control Display Controller

General information General information


The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
structions, refer to page 264.
menu items and enter the settings.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 45.
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ Operation
ditioning, the normal functions are restored. ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.

42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
iDrive AT A GLANCE

Button Function

Opens destination input menu for navi‐


gation.

Opens navigation map.

Press once: opens the previous dis‐


play.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Press and hold: open the menus used
last.

Opens the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller


Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.

The main menu is displayed.


Buttons on the Controller All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Button Function
Adjusting the main menu
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu items of 1. Press the button twice.
the main menu.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
Opens the Communication menu. played.
2. Select a menu item.
Opens the Media/Radio menu. 3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.

43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE iDrive

Selecting menu items ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".


Highlighted menu items can be selected. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
item is highlighted.
selected menu, for instance "Save station".

Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
2. Press the Controller. 4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
Changing between displays 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
After a menu item is selected, for instance displayed.
"iDrive settings", a new display appears. 7. Press the Controller.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previous Entering letters and numbers
display is shown.
Input
▷ Press the button. 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
The previous display re-opens. 2. : confirm entry.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens. Deleting
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
Symbol Function
opened.
Press the Controller: delete letters or
Opening recently used menus number.
The recently used menus can be displayed. Hold the Controller down: delete all
Press and hold this button. letters or numbers.

The recently used menus are displayed. Using alphabetical lists


For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
Opening the Options menu the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
Press the button.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
The "Options" menu is displayed. All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
The menu consists of various areas: played on the left edge.

44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
iDrive AT A GLANCE

2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. Entering special characters
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played. Input Operation

Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the


Touchpad ter. touchpad.

Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the


General information space. center of the touchpad.

Some iDrive functions can be operated using the Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
touchpad on the Controller. per area of the touchpad.

Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the


Selecting functions score. lower area of the touchpad.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" Using the map


2. "iDrive settings" The map in the navigation system can be moved
3. "Touchpad" via the touchpad.

4. Select the desired setting: Function Operation


▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
▷ "Map": use the map. rection.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐ Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
lecting the list field. map. pad with fingers.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
Display menu. Tap once.
letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbers


Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
Programmable memory
ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐ buttons
lowing:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper General information
and lower-case letters and numbers. To The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
make entries, you may need to change be‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, numbers rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
and characters, refer to page 44. tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
Control Display. used.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be Storing a function
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
1. Select function via iDrive.
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
2. Press and hold the desired button
ler.
until a signal sounds.

45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE iDrive

Executing a function
Press the button.

The function will work immediately. This means,


for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment


Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.

Deleting the button assignments


1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"

46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Voice activation system


Vehicle features and options Requirements
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Via the Control Display, set a language that is
cific and optional features offered with the series. also supported by the voice activation system so
It also describes features that are not necessarily that the spoken commands can be identified.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the To set the language, refer to page 50.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the Using the voice activation
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. system
Activating the voice activation system
Concept
1. Press the button on the steering
Most functions displayed on the Control Display wheel.
can be operated by voice commands via the
2. Wait for the signal.
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input. 3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
General information active.

▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ No other commands may be available. In this
hicle is stationary can only be operated via case, operate the function via iDrive.
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent. Terminating the voice activation
▷ The system uses a special microphone on system
the driver's side.
Press the button on the steering wheel
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ or ›Cancel‹.
structions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
Using a smartphone via voice
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, activation
and speed. A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
▷ Always say commands in the language of the used via voice activation.
voice activation system. Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on the


steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Voice command response is activated on the


smartphone.
Example: opening the tone
settings
2. Release the button.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
just as they are selected via the Controller.
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears needed.
on the Control Display.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Possible commands 3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands. Adjusting
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken. Setting the voice dialog
You can also select list entries such as phone list You can set the system to use standard dialog or
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐ a short version.
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the re‐ The short version of the voice dialog plays back
spective list. short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
Displaying possible commands
1. "My Vehicle"
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display: 2. "iDrive settings"
▷ Some possible commands for the current 3. "Language"
menu. 4. "Speech mode:"
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition. Activating voice recognition via the
▷ Encrypted connection is not available. server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
Help on the voice activation system vides a dictation function and a natural method of
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ entering destinations while improving the quality
ple of the voice activation system read out of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
loud: ›General information on voice control‹. transmitted to a service provider and stored lo‐
cally there.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹. Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"

48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

3. "Language"
Information for Emergency
4. "Server speech recognition"
Requests
Speaking during voice output Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
voice activation system. The function can be de‐ the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
rupted, for instance due to background noise or phone connection.
talking.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 256,
Via iDrive: close to the interior mirror.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Environmental conditions
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output" ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
Setting the language speaking.

The language to be used for voice activation and


system announcements can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.

Adjusting the volume


Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.

49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

General settings
Vehicle features and options 4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. rently used.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Setting the time
selected options or country versions. This also
Via iDrive:
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the 1. "My Vehicle"
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
served.
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
Language 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
Setting the language 6. Press the Controller.
Via iDrive: 7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
1. "My Vehicle"
8. Press the Controller.
2. "iDrive settings"
3. If necessary, "Language" Setting the time format
4. "Language:" Via iDrive:
5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
Setting the voice dialog 4. "Time format:"
For voice dialog for the voice activation system, 5. Select the desired setting.
refer to page 48. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.

Time Automatic time setting


Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
Setting the time zone the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
Via iDrive: updated automatically.
1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive:
2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Date and time" 2. "iDrive settings"

50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

3. "Date and time" 3. "Units"


4. "Automatic time setting" 4. Select the desired menu item.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
rently used. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.

Date
Activating/deactivating the
Setting the date display of the current vehicle
Via iDrive:
position
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Concept
3. "Date and time" If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
4. "Date:" vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
tomer portal.
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Via iDrive:

Setting the date format 1. "My Vehicle"


Via iDrive: 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:" Activating/deactivating popup
5. Select the desired setting. windows
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
Setting the units of or deactivated.
measurement Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
You can set the units of measurement for some
2. "iDrive settings"
values, for example, consumption, distances and
temperature. 3. "Pop-ups"
Via iDrive: 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
1. "My Vehicle"
rently used.
2. "iDrive settings"

51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

Control Display ▷ Communication messages, for example e-


mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
Brightness or the BMW Connected app.
Via iDrive: ▷ Check Control messages.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Service requirements messages.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
3. "Displays" Messages are additionally displayed in the status
4. "Control display" field.
5. "Brightness"
Retrieving messages
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. Via iDrive:
7. Press the Controller. 1. "Notifications"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. Select the desired message.
rently used. The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ sage is displayed.
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Deleting messages
Selecting the contents of the main All messages, except Check Control messages
menu or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
You can select the displayed contents for some be deleted from the list.
menu items in the main menu. Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
1. Press the button. they are relevant.
2. "Contents of main menu" Via iDrive:
3. Select the desired menu and the desired 1. "Notifications"
content. 2. Select the desired message.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. 3. Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Messages
Adjusting
Concept The following settings can be adjusted:
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
General information
ity.
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.

52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

Via iDrive: ▷ Driver profile settings.


1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Stored radio stations.

2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.

3. "Notifications" ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.

4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Music hard disk.


▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
Data protection ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
Data transfer
▷ Login accounts.
Concept Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for Functional requirement
some functions. Data can only be deleted while stationary.

General information Deleting data


With data transfer deactivated, the respective Note and follow the instructions on the Control
function cannot be used. Display.
Only make these settings while stationary. Via iDrive:

1. Switch on standby state.


Activating/deactivating
2. "My Vehicle"
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
3. "iDrive settings"
Via iDrive:
4. "Data privacy"
1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Delete personal data"
2. "iDrive settings" 6. "Delete personal data"
3. "Data privacy" 7. "OK"
4. Select the desired setting. 8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to com‐
Deleting personal data in the vehicle plete.

Concept If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐


Canceling deletion
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
iDrive.

General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:

53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

Connections The following connection types require one-time


pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
Concept
▷ Internet hotspot.
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection Paired devices are automatically recognized later
type to select depends on the mobile device and on and connected to the vehicle.
the desired function.
Safety information
General information
The following overview shows possible functions Warning
and the suitable connection types for them. The Operating the integrated information systems
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ and communication devices while driving can
vice. distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
Function Connection of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
type use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth. systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
system. tionary.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Compatible devices

Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or General information


phone or the audio player. USB. Information on mobile devices compatible with
Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
iDrive. USB. bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
USB storage device: USB.
or deviating software versions.
Exporting and importing driver
profiles. Displaying the vehicle identification
Performing software updates. number and software part number
Exporting and importing stored When looking for compatible devices, you may
trips. have to state the vehicle identification number
Playing music. and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
Via iDrive:
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice. 1. "My Vehicle"
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ Internet hot‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
cess. spot. 3. "Mobile devices"
Using Apple CarPlay apps via Bluetooth 4. "Settings"
iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.

54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

5. "Bluetooth® info" Activate function to transmit short mes‐


6. "System information" sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
A software update, refer to page 60, can be
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
performed, if needed.
vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Bluetooth connection
Activate function to show the contact pic‐
Functional requirements tures.

▷ Compatible device, refer to page 54, with ▷ "Apple CarPlay"


Bluetooth interface. Activate the function to use Apple Car‐
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle. Play.

▷ The device is ready for operation. 6. Move the Controller to the left.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 55.
Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle
Via iDrive:
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
er's manual of the device. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
Switching on Bluetooth
4. "Connect new device"
Via iDrive:
5. Select the functions for which the device will
1. "My Vehicle" be used:
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Telephone"
3. "Mobile devices" ▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
4. "Settings" ▷ "Apps"
5. "Bluetooth®" ▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
Activating/deactivating telephone the Control Display.
functions
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
To use all supported functions of a mobile devices in the vicinity.
phone, the following functions must be activated
prior to pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Via iDrive:
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
1. "My Vehicle" 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
2. "iDrive settings" number is displayed or the control number
3. "Mobile devices" must be entered.
4. "Settings" ▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
5. Select the desired setting, e.g.:
number on the display of the device.
▷ "Office"
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
ber on the device and via iDrive. not yet complete.
The device is connected and displayed in the ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
device list, refer to page 59. of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
If connection was not successful: Frequently transmitted.
Asked Questions, refer to page 56. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
Frequently Asked Questions ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
All requirements are met and all required steps from social networks.
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ stored is too high.
pected.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
In this case, the following explanations can help: stance due to stored information such as
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or notes.
connected? Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. audio source or as telephone.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with other devices. with the telephone or additional phone func‐
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from tion.
the device list on the mobile phone and start How can the phone connection quality be im‐
a new device search. proved?
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
has only a limited remaining battery life. mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on
Charge the mobile phone. the mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react? ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not charging tray.
function anymore. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
Switch the mobile phone off and on again. loudspeakers separately.

▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for If all points in this list have been checked and the
mobile phone operation. required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme fied service center or repair shop.
ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive? USB connection
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐ General information
vice. Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ the USB interface.
phone or additional phone function. ▷ Mobile phones.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?

56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance USB storage device, refer to the owner's
MP3 players. manual of the device.
▷ USB storage devices. Not compatible USB media:
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ USB hard drives.
and exFAT are the recommended formats. ▷ USB hubs.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐ ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
the device supports this. Follow the maximum
charge current of the USB interface. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
ces with data transfer: Functional requirement
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer Compatible device, refer to page 54, with USB
to page 80. interface.

▷ Playing music files via USB audio.


Connecting the device
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 60. page 188.
Follow the following when connecting: The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ vice list, refer to page 59.
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. Internet connection
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage. General information
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐ Up to 8 devices can be connected with the Inter‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be net hotspot.
guaranteed that every device is operable on
the vehicle. Functional requirements
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐ ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 54, with
treme environmental conditions, such as very WiFi interface.
high temperatures; refer to the owner's ▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
manual of the device. ▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ ▷ WiFi activated on the device.
niques, proper playback of the media stored
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases. ▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via Activating the Internet hotspot
the onboard socket, when it is connected to Via iDrive:
the USB interface.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
2. "iDrive settings"
being used, settings may be required on the
3. "Mobile devices"

57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

4. "Settings" Enter the desired network name.


5. "Internet hotspot" ▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
Connecting a device to the Internet 6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐
hotspot work name:
Via iDrive: Select the symbol.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Apple CarPlay preparation
3. "Mobile devices"
Concept
4. "Connect new device"
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
5. "Internet hotspot" Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ and iDrive.
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐ Functional requirements
lect network name on the device. ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 54.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
nect. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
You will need to purchase data volume from a ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
service provider when you first connect to the In‐ switched on on the iPhone.
ternet via the Internet hotspot.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot CarPlay preparation.
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased from Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
the ConnectedDrive Store.
Via iDrive:

Adjusting 1. "My Vehicle"


The network name and hotspot code can be 2. "iDrive settings"
changed. In addition, the network name can be 3. "Mobile devices"
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
4. "Settings"
ces.
5. Select the following settings:
Via iDrive:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices" Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair the iPhone with the vehicle via Bluetooth, re‐
4. Press the button. fer to page 55.
5. ▷ "Change hotspot key" Select CarPlay as the function:
Enter the desired hotspot code. "Apple CarPlay"
▷ "Change hotspot name" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 59.

58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

Operation Via iDrive:


For more information, refer to the Integrated 1. "My Vehicle"
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
2. "iDrive settings"
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
3. "Mobile devices"
Frequently Asked Questions A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
All requirements are met and all required steps used.
were completed in the specified order. Despite Symbol Function
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected. "Telephone"
In this case, the following explanations can help: "Additional telephone"
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple "Bluetooth® audio"
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected. "Apps"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device "Internet hotspot"
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned Configuring the device
from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
tooth and under WiFi.
paired and connected devices.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
Via iDrive:
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the 1. "My Vehicle"
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
fied service center or repair shop.
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
Managing mobile devices
5. Select the desired setting.
General information If a function is assigned to a device, the function
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
matically recognized and reconnected when vice that is already connected and the device will
standby state is switched on. be disconnected.

▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the


Disconnecting the device
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition. The device's connection to the vehicle is discon‐
nected.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see The device remains paired and can be con‐
owner's manual of the device. nected again, refer to page 60.
Via iDrive:
Displaying the device list
1. "My Vehicle"
All devices paired or connected with the vehicle
2. "iDrive settings"
are displayed in the device list.
3. "Mobile devices"

59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE General settings

4. Select device. Software update


5. "Disconnect device"
General information
Connecting the device The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
A disconnected device can be reconnected. devices, for example mobile phones and MP3
Via iDrive: players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-
1. "My Vehicle" to-date via regular vehicle software updates.
2. "iDrive settings" Updates and related current information is availa‐
3. "Mobile devices" ble at www.bmw.com/update.
4. Select device.
Displaying the version of the installed
5. "Connect device"
software
The functions that were assigned to the device
The software version installed in the vehicle is
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
displayed.
when it is reconnected. The functions may be
deactivated on a device already connected. Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
Deleting the device 2. "iDrive settings"
Via iDrive:
3. "Software update"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Show current version"
2. "iDrive settings" If an update has been carried out before, select
3. "Mobile devices" the desired version to display additional informa‐
4. Select device. tion.

5. "Delete device"
Updating software via USB
The device is disconnected and removed from
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
the device list.
hicle is stationary.

Swapping the telephone and additional Via iDrive:


phone 1. Store the file for the software update in the
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐ main directory of a USB flash drive.
cle, the functions of the phone and additional 2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
phone can be switched. interface, refer to page 188.
Via iDrive: 3. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Software update"
3. "Mobile devices" 6. "Update software"
4. "Settings" 7. "USB"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 8. "Install software"
9. "OK"

60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
General settings AT A GLANCE

10. Wait for the update to complete.


11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version


You can restore the software to the version prior
to the last update or to its factory settings.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. ▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.

61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

Owner's Manual media


Vehicle features and options Integrated Owner's Manual in
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
the vehicle
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Concept
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
selected options or country versions. This also scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
applies to safety-related functions and systems. cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
When using these functions and systems, the played on the Control Display.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.


General information
2. "My Vehicle"
You can use the following media formats to call 3. "Owner's Manual"
up the content in the Owner's Manual: 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 62. contents.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 62. Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Printed Owner's Manual
Context help
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐ General information
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
fered with the series. the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
Opening via iDrive
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a Change directly to the Options menu from the
printed book from the service center. function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.


2. "Owner's Manual"

62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Opening when a Check Control message


2. Press the desired programmable
is displayed
memory button and hold for more than 2 sec‐
Directly from the Check Control message on the onds.
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual" Executing
Press the corresponding button.
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button.


2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the


last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the page


of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 45, and called up directly.

Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"

63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE BMW eDRIVE

BMW eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options Overview

This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐


cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
1 Vehicle battery
2 Fuel filler flap
BMW eDRIVE 3 High-voltage battery
4 Charging socket
Special features of the BMW i 5 Drive unit

High-voltage system
Concept
This BMW i is an electric vehicle. The vehicle
features a high-voltage system that consists of The vehicle can be operated emissions free us‐
an electric motor and a high-voltage battery ing its electrical drive system.
among other things. The special high-voltage battery supplies the
Optionally, the vehicle has a combustion engine electric motor as well as the comfort features
that generates electrical energy via a generator with power.
and thereby increases the range. This combus‐ The high-voltage battery is charged via a charg‐
tion engine is called the Range Extender. ing cable, for instance when parked or while driv‐
ing by energy recovery.
Carbon body The vehicle can be charged very rapidly at spe‐
The vehicle consists of the functional units: cial charging stations. Charging is also possible
▷ Drive module of aluminum. at household power sockets.

▷ Life module of carbon fiber reinforced plastic, On the go, the energy recovery ensures that only
CFRP. little energy is lost when braking.
When the vehicle decelerates, the electric motor
acts as a generator and converts the kinetic en‐
ergy released into electric current.
As a result the high-voltage battery is partially re‐
charged in order to reach maximum range.
An optional Range Extender can supply the drive
system with power and thus increase the range
of the vehicle.

64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
BMW eDRIVE AT A GLANCE

Functions Sensible driving and early speed reduction are


important to make full use of the energy recovery
Electric driving: eDRIVE feature.

The vehicle is powered exclusively by the electric


motor. The accelerator pedal can be used not Display
just for acceleration, but also for deceleration. The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 115, provide
When the vehicle decelerates, the electric motor information about the current state of the drive
acts as a generator and charges the high-voltage and visualize the system's use in a diagram.
battery. With a sensible driving style, this function
can be used for especially efficient energy recov‐ Maximize energy-saving driving and
ery and comfortable driving, using just the accel‐ range
erator pedal.
Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite for
as large a range as possible. eDRIVE provides
Acoustic pedestrian protection various functions that assist with an energy-sav‐
Depending on the country-specific version, the ing driving style and help to monitor the range,
system generates a continuous driving noise and if needed, to increase it. The following de‐
during electric driving at low speeds. scriptions provide an overview of the available
functions and the personal measures.
Coasting
An especially efficient operating point is so- Before driving
called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is decel‐ eDRIVE allows use of the air conditioner even
erated only by driving resistance and no energy before driving off. The stationary climate control,
flows between high-voltage battery and electric refer to page 179, provides more range than us‐
motor. In order to coast, depress the accelerator ing full air conditioning while driving.
pedal far enough that the mark in the instrument
Parked vehicle ventilation during the charging
cluster, refer to page 114, is exactly in the cen‐
process can provide maximum range when driv‐
ter.
ing off.

Energy recovery: CHARGE Trip planning and special functions of the


The high-voltage battery is charged while driving navigation system
through energy recovery.
Several special functions of the navigation sys‐
The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐ tem support trip planning taking into account the
verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐ electric range:
cal energy.
▷ Range assistant, refer to Integrated Owner's
Charging can take place in various situations Manual, checks whether an entered naviga‐
while the vehicle is in motion: tion destination can be reached. If the range
▷ As soon as the accelerator pedal is only is not sufficient, various recommendations to
slightly depressed. help increase the range are displayed auto‐
▷ During vehicle braking. matically, for instance an alternative ECO
PRO route is displayed.
The mark in the instrument cluster is located
within the CHARGE range. ▷ Intermodal routing or intermodal information,
refer to Integrated Owner's Manual, as route

65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
AT A GLANCE BMW eDRIVE

criterion support trip planning using public Long-term vehicle storage


transportation.
Observe the information on vehicle storage and
▷ Range map indicates the action range on the for longer idle periods, refer to page 264.
navigation map, refer to Integrated Owner's
Manual.
▷ Charging assistant under Points of Interest in
navigation, helps to find and possibly include
a public charging station in the desired route,
refer to Integrated Owner's Manual.

During driving
▷ General driving tips, refer to page 206, for in‐
creasing the range.
▷ Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to
page 200, for an optimized driving style.
▷ ECO PRO Driving style analysis, refer to
page 209, for Driving style analysis.
▷ ECO PRO and ECO PRO+, refer to
page 207, driving mode for increasing the
range.
▷ Display of the consumption history, refer to
page 117.
▷ Display of secondary functions and the po‐
tential range, refer to page 117.

After the trip


▷ Charge vehicle, refer to page 212, and plan
next trip.
▷ Prepare for long downtimes, refer to
page 264.

BMW i Remote app


A special BMW i Remote App allows you to con‐
trol and display certain vehicle functions using a
smartphone.

Safety of the high-voltage system


Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 67.

66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety of the high-voltage system AT A GLANCE

Safety of the high-voltage system


Safety of the high-voltage
system
Working on the vehicle

DANGER
Improperly performed work, in particular main‐
tenance and repair on the high-voltage system
and the carbon body as well as accessories ret‐
rofits, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk
of injury, fire and danger to life. Have work on
the vehicle, in particular maintenance and re‐
pair, performed by an authorized BMW i deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.

Contact with water


The high-voltage system is typically safe even in
the following example situations:
▷ Water in the floor area, for instance after a
rainstorm when the roof was kept open.
▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the allowed
height.
▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system is
switched off automatically to prevent risk of dan‐
ger to occupants and other traffic.
Read the information on What to do after an ac‐
cident, refer to page 257.

67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................... 88
Transporting children safely .................................................................... 96
Driving ....................................................................................................... 100
Displays ..................................................................................................... 114
Lights ......................................................................................................... 129
Safety ........................................................................................................ 134
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 150
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 154
Climate control ......................................................................................... 173
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 182
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 193

69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening and closing


Vehicle features and options remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Warning
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
selected options or country versions. This also special knowledge.
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
When using these functions and systems, the
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
served.
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.

Remote control
Warning
General information
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
with integrated key. themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐ following actions:
tery, refer to page 72. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
sion, various settings, refer to page 82, can be
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
configured for the button functions.
dows.
A personal driver's profile, refer to page 80, for
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
each remote control is stored in the vehicle.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
ments, the service data is stored in the remote There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
control, refer to page 250. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
exiting and lock the vehicle.
control, take the remote control with you when
exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the

70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

Overview The light functions may depend on the ambient


brightness.

Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.

Pressing and holding the button on the remote


control opens the windows and the glass sun‐
roof.

1 Unlocking
Locking
2 Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode 2. Press the button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
Unlocking ▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked.
Press the button on the remote control. ▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and
the horn. This function must be activated in
the settings, refer to page 82.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 82,
the following access points are unlocked: ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 83, is
switched on.
▷ Driver's door.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
Press the button on the remote control again
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
to unlock the other vehicle access points.
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
▷ All doors and tailgate. switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals With Comfort Access: convenient
and the horn. This function must be activated closing
in the settings, refer to page 82.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer Safety information
to page 80, are applied.
▷ The interior lights, refer to page 132, are Warning
switched on, unless they were manually
With convenient closing, body parts can be
switched off.
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light that the area of movement of the doors is clear
and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to during convenient closing.
page 130, are switched on.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open. Closing
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 83, is Press and hold the button on the remote
switched off. control in the area close to the vehicle.

71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,


as long as the button on the remote control is Warning
pressed. The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
The exterior mirrors are folded in. a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the Make sure that the area of movement of the
hazard warning flashers are switched on. tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Switching on interior lights and


courtesy light NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
Press the button on the remote control
windows and heat conductors while driving.
with the vehicle locked.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
This function is not available, if the interior lights the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
were switched off manually. not hit the windows.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Opening
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again. Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Tailgate The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the Panic mode
remote control in the cargo area. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ self in a dangerous situation.
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
remote control. To perform settings, refer to
page 82. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
Safety information To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Warning Replacing the battery


Body parts can be jammed when operating the 1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that control, refer to page 74.
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
during opening and closing. tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the

72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

cover with a lever movement of the Malfunction


integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 72.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
high transmitting power.
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
tive side facing up. ing process of mobile devices, for instance
5. Press the cover closed. charging of a mobile phone.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote con‐ In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
trol until it engages. unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 74.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
Switching the drive-ready state on via
service center or repair shop or take
emergency detection of the remote
them to a collection point.
control

Additional remote controls


Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controls


A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.

73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready Safety information


state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Warning
Proceed as follows in this case:
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
1. Hold the remote control with its tip against special knowledge.
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
attention to the display in the instrument
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
cluster.
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
2. If the remote control is detected: the vehicle from the outside when there are
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ people in it.
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐ NOTICE
peat the procedure. The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
Frequently Asked Questions pulling the door handle with the integrated key
What precautions can be taken to be able to inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐ damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
mote control? erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW Connected app include the
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
Removing
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.

Integrated key Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
without the remote control using the integrated
key. 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

To do this, slide the integrated key into the


opening from below and unlock the lid.
Buttons for the central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.

Overview

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the


integrated key.

Buttons for the central locking system.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked


Locking
from the inside. Press the button with the doors closed.

Alarm system The vehicle is not secured against theft when


The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ locking.
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is Unlocking
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the Press the button.
door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with The vehicle locks automatically after you drive
the remote control or switch on radio-ready off.
state, if needed, through emergency detection of
the remote control, refer to page 73. Opening

▷ Press button to unlock the doors to‐


gether, and then pull the door handle above
the armrest.
▷ Pull the door opener on the door to be
opened. The other door remain locked.

75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Rear doors General information


Comfort Access supports the following func‐
General information tions:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
front safety belt is completely wound up.
▷ Convenient closing.

Overview ▷ Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking
The door openers are located on the inside, next
to the front safety belts.

Opening
1. Open the corresponding front door.
2. Pull door opener backward.
To better reach the front door's handle fold the
front seat's backrests, refer to page 89, down.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
Closing passenger door completely.
When closing, make sure that the corresponding This corresponds with pressing the button
front door is far enough open. on the remote control.

Comfort Access Locking

Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior. Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door with your finger for

76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐ If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
dle. locked doors are not unlocked.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control. Safety information

Convenient closing Warning


Body parts can be jammed when operating the
Safety information tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
Warning
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing. The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
Closing tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.

Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐


Opening
er's or front passenger door, arrow, with your fin‐
ger and hold it there without grasping the door
handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.

In addition to locking, the windows and the glass


sunroof close. The exterior mirrors fold in, de‐
pending on the model.

Opening the tailgate Press button next on tailgate.

General information This corresponds with pressing the button


on the remote control.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.

77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may NOTICE
malfunction under the following circumstances: Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
charged. Replace the battery, refer to property. Make sure that the wipers with the
page 72. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power. Unlocking from the inside
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
With the vehicle stationary, press the
objects.
button in the driver's floor area.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects. The hood is unlocked and slightly raised.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ Opening
rect proximity to the remote control. 1. Press the release handle and open the hood.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 74.

Hood Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, the hood can
Safety information be unlocked manually.

1. Remove cover underneath the unlock but‐


Warning tons.
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of hood is clear
during opening and closing.

2. Remove wire cable and pull it back.


The hood is unlocked and slightly raised.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

Tailgate Opening and closing

Opening from the outside


General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
remote control. To perform settings, refer to
page 82.

Safety information ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.


With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
Warning have the remote control with you.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the Press button next on tailgate.
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear ▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
during opening and closing. trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. For unlocking with the remote
Warning control, refer to page 72.
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. upward.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area twice in
NOTICE quick succession.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
windows and heat conductors while driving. must be engaged first.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
not hit the windows. upward.

79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Closing used to apply settings in the vehicle without


changing the personal driver profiles.

Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down. mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
Driver profiles driver's door.

Concept Adjusting
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐ The settings for the following systems and func‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
when required. of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
General information ▷ Unlocking and locking.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐ ▷ Lights.
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ ▷ Climate control.
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐
▷ Radio.
signed.
▷ Instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control,
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐ ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are ▷ Volumes, tone.
automatically applied. ▷ Control Display.
If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Navigation.
the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is
being unlocked. These settings are also re‐ ▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the mean‐ ▷ Rearview camera.
time by a person with a different remote control. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored ▷ Intelligent Safety.
in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the Profile management
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is assigned to the remote Selecting a driver profile
control currently used.
Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐
There is an additional guest profile available that ent driver profile may be activated. This allows
is not assigned to any remote control. It can be you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if

80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐ 5. Enter profile name.
mote control. 6. Select the symbol.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
2. "Driver profiles"
are reset to their factory settings.
3. Select driver profile.
Via iDrive:
4. "OK"
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ All settings stored in the selected driver pro‐
file are automatically applied. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the 3. Select driver profile.
remote control being used at the time. The driver profile marked with this symbol
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐ can be reset.
ferent remote control, this driver profile will 4. "Reset driver profile"
apply to both remote controls. 5. "OK"

Using a guest profile Exporting driver profiles


The guest profile is for individual settings that are Most settings of the active driver profile can be
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐ exported.
files.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
Via iDrive: personal settings, for instance before delivering
1. "My Vehicle" the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
2. "Driver profiles"
Via iDrive:
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not 2. "Driver profiles"
assigned to the current remote control. 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
Renaming a driver profile can be exported.
A personal name can be assigned to the active 4. "Export driver profile"
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profiles.
driver profile.
Via iDrive:
▷ "USB device"
1. "My Vehicle" Select the USB storage device, as
2. "Driver profiles" needed, refer to page 56.
3. Select driver profile. ▷ Online.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be renamed. Importing driver profiles
4. "Change driver profile name" The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.

81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Via iDrive:
Adjusting
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles" General information
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. Depending on the package and country version,
The driver profile marked with this symbol various settings are available for the remote con‐
can be overwritten. trol functions.
4. "Import driver profile" These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 80, currently used.
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
Unlocking
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed. Doors
▷ Online. Via iDrive:
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
1. "My Vehicle"

Displaying driver profiles during start 2. "Vehicle settings"

The driver profiles can be displayed at each 3. "Doors/Key"


startup to select the desired profile. 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting:

1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Driver's door only"

2. "Driver profiles" Only the driver's door is unlocked. Press‐


ing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
▷ "All doors"
System limits The entire vehicle is unlocked.
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following Tailgate
cases, for example. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or try version, this setting may not be offered.
her own remote control, but another person Via iDrive:
is driving.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
2. "Vehicle settings"
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her. 3. "Doors/Key"

▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 4. Select the symbol.
locked and unlocked. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside ▷ "Tailgate"
of the vehicle. The tailgate is unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.

82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Alarm system


Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" General information


2. "Vehicle settings" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
3. "Doors/Key" system reacts to the following changes:

4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ ▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or
tion signals. the tailgate.

▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" ▷ Movements in the car's interior.

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance during
ing by one. attempts at stealing a wheel.

▷ With alarm system: ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" ▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis.
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the
horn. ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard
Automatic locking Diagnosis, refer to page 251.
Via iDrive:
The alarm system signals these changes visually
1. "My Vehicle" and acoustically:
2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Acoustic alarm:
3. "Doors/Key" Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
4. Select the desired setting: alarm may be suppressed.

▷ "Lock automatically" ▷ Visual alarm:

The vehicle locks automatically after a By flashing the exterior lighting.


while if no door is opened after unlocking.
Switching on/off
Automatic unlocking When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
Via iDrive: remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
system will also switch on or off at the same
1. "My Vehicle" time.
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key" Opening the doors with the alarm
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
system switched on
After the engine is switched off by pressing The alarm system is triggered when a door is
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is opened if the door was unlocked using the
automatically unlocked. integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 85.

83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening the tailgate with the alarm ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
system switched on til the radio-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on. An alarm has been triggered.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐


tored again provided the doors are locked. The Tilt alarm sensor
hazard warning system flashes once. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
Panic mode attempts to steal a wheel.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation. Interior motion sensor
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐ The windows and the glass sunroof must be
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds. closed for the system to function properly.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession. Avoiding unintentional alarms
To switch off the alarm: press any button. General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Indicator light on the interior mirror can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ ing.
onds:
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
The alarm system is switched on. sor can be switched off in such situations.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor interior motion sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are Press the button on the remote control
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
points are secured. locked.
When the still open access points are closed, The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ onds and then continues to flash.
sor will be switched on.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.

84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

Switching off the alarm


▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or point.
establish radio-ready state, if needed through
The window opens automatically. Pressing
emergency detection of remote control, refer
the switch again stops the motion.
to page 73.
For convenient opening via the remote control,
▷ With Comfort Access:
refer to page 71.
If you are carrying the remote control on your
person, grasp the door handle on the driver's
Closing
or front passenger door completely.

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.


Power windows The window closes while the switch is being
held.

Safety information ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance


point.
Warning The window closes automatically if the door
When operating the windows, body parts and is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 77.
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear Jam protection system
during opening and closing.
Concept
Overview The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.

General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
terrupted and the window opens slightly.

Safety information
Power windows
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
Opening can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. movement of the windows.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.

85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Opening and closing

Closing without the jam protection Tilting the glass sunroof


system Push switch briefly upward.
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts.
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
position. The sun protection
and hold it there.
does not move.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted. Opening/closing the glass sunroof
and sun protection
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point ▷ Press the switch in the desired
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it direction to the resistance
there. point and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection. The glass sunroof moves as
long as the switch is held
down.
Glass sunroof, electric
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
General information The glass sunroof moves automatically.
The glass sunroof can be operated when the
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
standby state is switched on.
▷ Opening and closing the sun protection man‐
ually.
Safety information
For convenient opening via the remote control,
Warning refer to page 71.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 76.
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass Comfort position
sunroof is clear during opening and closing. In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
Overview tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.

Jam protection system

General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is

86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Opening and closing CONTROLS

interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
position. The glass sunroof opens slightly. without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the open position without
jam protection Initializing the system
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows: Press the switch up and hold it
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance until initialization is complete.
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted. Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
2. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ has opened then closed again.
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position without


jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without
jam protection.

Initializing after a power interruption

General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.

87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel


Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
cific and optional features offered with the series. efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
selected options or country versions. This also danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
applies to safety-related functions and systems. the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
When using these functions and systems, the most upright position as possible and do not
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ adjust again while driving.
served.

Warning
Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
ment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally, fol‐
low the following chapters for safe driving: Adjusting seats
▷ Seats, refer to page 88.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 90. Overview
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 91.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 134.

Seats
Safety information

Warning 1 Forward/backward
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐ 2 Height
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐ 3 Backrest tilt
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.

88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Forward/backward Assistance with entering the vehicle


in the rear

Safety information

Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐ ment.
rection.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages properly.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐
Height rest while driving may occur if the rear seat
backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be
lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock
the rear seat backrests before driving.

Fold the rear seat backrest down


1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat


or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.


Backrest returns to its initial position after re‐
lease.

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐


rest or lift it off, as necessary.

89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Front seat heating General information


Always make sure that safety belts are being
Overview worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Seat heating Warning


Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
Switching on safety belt to serve its protective function.
Press the button once for each temper‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
ature level. not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
The maximum temperature is reached when gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
three LEDs are lit. lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
restraint systems.
after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
If ECO PRO+ is activated, refer to page 207, the
Warning
seat heating is deactivated.
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
Switching off are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
Press and hold the button until the safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
LEDs go out. stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt Warning
buckles The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to en‐ belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐ following situations:
fer protection when adjusted correctly. ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.

90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
modified. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in mechanism.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, Safety belt reminder for driver's and
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐ passenger's seat
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
Display in the instrument cluster
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
Correct use of safety belts reminder can also be activated if objects are
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to placed on the front passenger seat.
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on Front head restraints
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp Safety information
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
Warning
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
A missing protective effect due to removed or
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward not correctly adjusted head restraints can
around your upper body. cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
Buckling the safety belt ▷ Before driving, install the removed head
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder restraints on the occupied seats.
and hip to put it on. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt ports the back of the head at as close to
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage eye level as possible.
audibly. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.

Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Unbuckling the safety belt
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. hangers, directly on the head restraint.

91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐


termined to be safe for attachment to a Warning
head restraint. Body parts can be jammed when moving the
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
pillows, while driving. sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.

Adjusting the height


The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
Warning
justed.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
Distance
is a risk of injury.
The distance to the back of the head is adjusted
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
via the backrest tilt.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
as close as possible to the back of the head.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
Remove termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Rear head restraints
Height
Safety information
Adjusting
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
eye level as possible.
the head restraint down.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the After setting the height, make sure that the head
backrest tilt as needed. restraint engages correctly.

92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Folding down the head restraint Mirrors


Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Exterior mirrors

General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

Warning
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2. they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
head restraint engages correctly.
by looking over your shoulder.

Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
Overview
sitting in the seat in question.

1 Adjusting
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor,
page 191. automatic cornering adjustment
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐ 3 Folding in and out
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head Selecting a mirror
restraint out completely.
To change over to the other mirror:

Installing Slide the switch.

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head


restraint.

93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Adjusting electrically Folding in and out


Press the button.
The mirror movement follows the button NOTICE
movement. Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
Malfunction
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Press the button.

Automatic cornering adjustment


Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
Concept 15 mph/20 km/h.

During right-hand turns, the mirror glass is Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
turned. Provides a better view of the vehicle lowing situations:
sideways. ▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Safety information
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Automatic heating
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. needed and when the drive-ready state is
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch switched on.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
Functional requirements
ror are used to control this.
▷ Vehicle moving.
▷ Speed less than 12 mph/20 km/h. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
▷ Turn signal is set. mirror
Activating Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
slide the switch to the driver's side mir‐
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
ror position.
improves your view of the curb and other format‐
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
Deactivating
for instance.
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.

94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Activating Functional requirements


▷ Keep the photocells clean.
1. slide the switch to the driver's side
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror position.
mirror and the windshield.
2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Steering wheel


Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position. Safety information

Interior mirror, manually dimmable Warning


Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
Flip lever lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.

Adjusting

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐


ror, flip the lever forward.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming


feature
1. Fold the lever down.
Overview
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Photocells are used for control:


▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely


Vehicle features and options Always transport children in the rear
seat
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. General information
It also describes features that are not necessarily Accident research shows that the safest place
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the for children is in the rear seat.
selected options or country versions. This also
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
When using these functions and systems, the
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
served.
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
The right place for children no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.

Safety information Safety information

Warning Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
following actions: cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ the event of an accident or during braking and
dows. evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
▷ Using vehicle equipment. 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
Children on the front passenger seat
exiting and lock the vehicle.
General information
If you need to use a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation
of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 136.

96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Safety information Have damaged child restraint systems or child


restraint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and, where
Warning applicable, replaced by the dealer's service
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a center or another qualified service center or re‐
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ pair shop.
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ On the front passenger seat
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Deactivating airbags

Installing child restraint systems Warning


Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
Safety information child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
Warning bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat. Before installing a child restraint system in the
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
sure that the child restraint system fits securely knee and side airbags on the front passenger
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the side are deactivated.
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats tomatically, refer to page 136.
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ Seat position and height
straints or remove them.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the
Warning best possible position for the belt and to offer
The protective effect of child restraint systems optimal protection in the event of an accident.
and their fastening systems which have been If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
ited or lost. For instance, a child can may not be move the front passenger seat carefully forward
sufficiently restrained in the event of an acci‐ until the best possible belt guide position is
dent or braking and evasive maneuvers. There reached.
is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not use damaged child restraint systems or
child restraint systems that have been exposed
to an accident, and replace them instead.

97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Child seat security Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors


The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
The rear safety belts and the front passenger not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
child restraint systems. limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
Locking the safety belt curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
backrest.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it Position
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked. Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol


Unlocking the safety belt shows the mounts for the lower
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. LATCH anchors.
2. Remove the child restraint system. Seats equipped with lower an‐
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ chors are marked with a pair, (2),
pletely. of LATCH symbols.

Before installing LATCH child


LATCH child restraint fixing restraint fixing systems
system Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Assembly of LATCH child restraint
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ fixing systems
mation from the child restraint system manufac‐ 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐ er's information.
straint fixing systems. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.

98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Child restraint systems with Routing the retaining strap


tether strap
Safety information

Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does 1 Direction of travel
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as 2 Head restraint
it passes the upper anchor.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor

Warning 5 Seat backrest

If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective 6 Upper retaining strap
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance Attaching the upper retaining strap to
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the anchor
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
the rear backrests are locked. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the supports of the head
restraint to the anchor.
NOTICE 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of backrest and the cargo cover.
child restraint systems are only provided for 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
these retaining straps. When other objects are anchor.
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors
The respective symbol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining strap. Seats with
an upper top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest
or the rear window shelf.

99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

Driving
Vehicle features and options Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and radio-ready state
is switched back on.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
It also describes features that are not necessarily long as the charging cable is connected, refer to
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the page 212.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
Radio-ready state
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Some electronic systems/power consumers are
served. ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally:
Start/Stop button ▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-
Overview ready state switched off manually.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
Button in the vehicle ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ If the charge state of the batteries is low.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance
drive-ready state is automatically switched off for
the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
1 Start/Stop button beams to parking lights.
2 Park P Radio-ready state is also switched back on if the
on/off button on the radio is pressed when the
3 Selector lever
vehicle is parked.
If drive-ready state is switched on: the system
Concept automatically switches to radio-ready state when
Pressing the Start/Stop button the driver's door is opened and the driver's safety
switches standby state on or off. belt is unbuckled if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.

100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

Standby state The drive-ready state is switched off automati‐


cally if the driver's safety belt is not buckled
All electronic systems/power consumers are
when the driver's door is opened.
ready for operation. Odometer and trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Safety information
To preserve the battery, use standby state and
activated power features only as long as abso‐
lutely necessary. NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Turning on standby state gaged when drive-ready state is switched off.
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
state on or off. switch drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.
Standby state is switched off automatically:
▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low
beams are switched on. Drive-ready state in detail
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the Safety information
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
Warning
with driver's door open and low beams off.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
▷ When the batteries' state of charge is low, if
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
the low beams are switched off.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
▷ The low beams switch to parking lights after ing.
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is against rolling away, follow the following:
no other person sitting in the front seats.
▷ Set the parking brake.

Drive-ready state ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,


turn the front wheels in the direction of the
Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a
curb.
running engine in conventional vehicles. Deacti‐
vated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
the engine off. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehicle
ready to drive and the READY signal, refer to
page 101, is displayed in the instrument cluster. Switching on drive-ready state
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. 1. Close the driver's door.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ 2. Depress the brake pedal.
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
To save battery power when parking, switch off Drive-ready state is switched on.
drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic
systems/power consumers.

101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

Display in the instrument cluster Driving off


The READY display indicates that
the vehicle is ready for driving. Functional requirements
Driving is possible under the following condi‐
tions:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
Display on the Start/Stop button ▷ The driver's door is closed.

General information State of charge in strong temperature


fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage bat‐
tery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle
again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge
vehicle with low state of charge in time.

Driving
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Drive-ready state is also displayed through light
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
indicators on the Start/Stop button.
lever in position D or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
Lighting pulses orange
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
▷ After unlocking and opening the door.
▷ After switching off drive-ready state. Selector lever positions
When the brake pedal is depressed, the lighting
becomes more intense.

Lighting lights up steady blue


After drive-ready state is switched on, light turns
blue. The vehicle is ready to drive. The READY
indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. In
addition, a signal sounds.

Lighting off The engaged selector lever position is displayed


Drive-ready state, standby state and radio-ready on the selector lever.
state are switched off. The vehicle is in the idle
state. The charging cable may be connected.
D Drive
Position for normal vehicle operation.

102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

R is reverse Engage D, N, R
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 103, in selector lever position N.

P Park
Engage only while the vehicle is stationary and
the brake is applied. The drive wheels are Turn the selector lever in the desired direction.
blocked. The engaged selector lever position is displayed
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ on the selector lever.
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the driver's safety belt is off, the driver's Engaging P
door is open and neither brake nor accelera‐
tor pedal are depressed while drive-ready
state is switched on and selector lever posi‐
tion D or R is set.
▷ After switching off drive-ready state via the
Start/Stop button, if selector lever position D
or R is set.
▷ With standby state switched off.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle Press button P.
may begin to move. On uphill grades, also Set
parking brake, refer to page 107.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
▷ Interlock: the selector lever position P can be
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
exited only with drive-ready state engaged.
▷ Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press Engaging selector lever position N
on the brake pedal before shifting out of P
or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
executed. the brake pedal.

▷ Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove the 2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
charging cable from the vehicle; otherwise, 3. Depress the brake pedal.
the shift command will not be executed. 4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.

103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

In this way, standby state remains switched Switching off drive-ready state
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical sys‐
played.
tem such as for cooling the high-voltage system
The vehicle can roll. might still be audible.
After stopping the vehicle:
NOTICE
1. Apply brake and engage the selector lever in
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ position P.
gaged when standby state is switched off.
2. Set the parking brake.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever sounds.
position P is automatically engaged after approx. In case of longer idle times, follow the instruc‐
15 minutes. tions in the Care chapter, refer to page 264.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if Driving in detail: eDRIVE
needed.
Safety information
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock DANGER
The braking power of the electric motor can be
General information
stronger than for a vehicle with combustion en‐
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to gine. Abrupt braking and slow-down may con‐
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. fuse other traffic. There is a risk of accident.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the Carefully release the accelerator pedal. Adjust
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
away. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed.
Warning
2. Depress the brake pedal.
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and
3. Turn and hold the selector lever in position N.
other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐
A corresponding Check Control message is hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a
displayed. risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
4. Turn the selector lever again into position N conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
within approx. 2 seconds. tervene where appropriate.
Position N is indicated on the selector lever.
5. Release Start/Stop button and brake.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.

104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

▷ The vehicle is moving.


Warning ▷ Speed higher than approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
Without energy recovery, there is no braking ▷ Selector lever position D or R is set.
power of the electric motor available. The vehi‐
▷ Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only
cle could roll further than anticipated. There is a
pressed down one third of the way.
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Energy cannot be recovered in the following sit‐
tervene where appropriate. uations:
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ While drive stability control systems, for in‐
Accelerator pedal positions stance DTC, are active and controlling the
vehicle, even though this is not indicated by
an indicator light.
▷ The high-voltage battery is fully charged.
▷ When temperature of the high-voltage bat‐
tery is very low or very high.
In winter it might be possible that the energy
recovery is temporarily unavailable after
startup.

1 Deceleration Exemplary traffic situations


2 Coasting If a deceleration operation is foreseeable while
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER driving, this can be used for energy recovery.
The following exemplary driving situations may
Deceleration be suitable:
The deceleration depends on the position of the ▷ Decelerating downhill.
accelerator pedal. The less the actuation of the ▷ Deceleration before a red light.
accelerator pedal, the greater the deceleration. In Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, decelerate
this way energy is recovered and the high-volt‐ the vehicle using energy recovery.
age battery is charged.
Releasing the accelerator pedal causes decelera‐ Coasting
tion similar to cautious braking. Additionally, the
The electric drive makes it possible to roll with‐
brake lights will come on without hitting the
out consuming energy. This driving condition is
brakes.
referred to as coasting.

Energy recovery: CHARGE Proactive driving reduces energy consumption


and increases the range.
The high-voltage battery is recharged in part
through energy recovery. The electric motor acts With vehicle rolling, no energy is recovered.
as a generator when decelerating and converts
the kinetic energy into electrical energy. Exemplary traffic situations
Energy can be recovered if the following condi‐ If a route can be traveled without anticipated
tions are met: need for braking, it is advantageous to roll.

105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

The following exemplary driving situations may Using the Range Extender
be suitable: Purely electric use of the vehicle offers the full
▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without performance capability of the drive and the most
obstacles. efficient use of the vehicle.
▷ Coasting on a route without obstacles. Range Extender is designed to enable further
Avoid late or abrupt braking. driving in situations, in which the purely electric
range is not sufficient. E.g., the next charging sta‐
Acoustic pedestrian protection tion can be reached.
With a very low charge state of the high-voltage
Concept battery, the drive power is reduced on sharp up‐
hill grades or at high speeds in order to allow fur‐
Depending on the country-specific version, the
ther driving.
system generates a continuous driving noise
during electric driving up to approx. This avoids a complete discharge of the high-
20 mph/30 km/h. voltage battery.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the A Check Control message indicates an upcom‐
surroundings. ing reduction in drive power. The power reduc‐
tion is displayed in the performance display, refer
As a result, other road users, for instance pedes‐
to page 116.
trians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.

Automatic maintenance run


Range Extender
Avoid having long periods when the Range Ex‐
Increasing the range tender is not used. To ensure functional reliabil‐
ity, the Range Extender is automatically activated
If the charge state of the high-voltage battery at certain intervals for a few minutes while driv‐
drops during travel to a minimum value, the ing. Respective Check Control messages indi‐
Range Extender starts and supplies the required cate the maintenance run. It the maintenance run
electrical energy for driving on. of the Range Extender is occurring at an unfavor‐
The symbol on the charge state indicator able time, it can be canceled by pressing the
designates a Range Extender activation time. Start/Stop button. It postpones the maintenance
The Range Extender controls its output automat‐ run.
ically, turns itself off and restarts according to the Should the high-voltage battery be fully charged
driving situation. or if there is not enough gas in the tank then a
If Range Extender is activated, the current maintenance run will not be executed.
charge state of the high-voltage battery is main‐
tained. If necessary, the Range Extender charges Heavily discharged high-voltage
the high-voltage battery until the charge state at battery
the time of the activation of the Range Extender
If the high-voltage battery is heavily discharged
has been reached.
during the trip, the performance and some com‐
The Range Extender has no direct connection to fort features are reduced step-by-step to extend
the drive train. the range.

106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

Heated high-voltage battery ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,


turn the front wheels in the direction of the
With a stationary vehicle curb.

In exceptional cases, it is possible that the high- ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
voltage battery heats up sharply when the vehi‐ also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
cle is stationary. E.g., with extreme external tem‐ wheel chock.
peratures and direct solar radiation. Drive-ready
state cannot be switched on if the high-voltage
battery is overheated. Warning
A Check Control message is displayed. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
Another message will indicate when drive-ready
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
state is available again.
following actions:

While driving ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.

If the high-voltage battery overheats during the ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
trip, the performance is reduced step-by-step in ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
order to cool down the battery. The ePOWER dows.
performance display in the instrument cluster de‐ ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
creases. If the temperature increases further,
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
park the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has
cooled down. If the performance display falls to There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
0, the drive-ready state is switched off and the leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
vehicle comes to a stop. hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.

Parking brake
Overview
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Parking brake
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Setting
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake. With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.

107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

The LED lights up. After a power failure


The indicator light lights up red. The Re-activating the parking brake
parking brake is set.
1. Switch on standby state.

While driving 2. Press the switch while stepping on the


To use as emergency brake while driving: brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes It may take several seconds for the brake to be
hard while the switch is being pulled. reactivated. Some mechanical sounds associ‐
ated with this process are normal.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights light up. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter goes out as soon as the parking brake
A Check Control message is displayed.
is ready for operation.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Hold function
Releasing
Concept
Releasing manually
The system holds the vehicle automatically when
1. Switch on drive-ready state. gear is engaged. This prevents rolling against the
direction of travel.
2. Press the switch while stepping on the
In selector lever position D, the vehicle cannot
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
roll backwards. In selector lever position R, it can‐
The LED and indicator light go out. not roll forward. The brake pedal does not have
The parking brake is released. to be pressed.

Automatic release Reducing energy consumption


For automatic release, step on the accelerator To reduce energy consumption when the hold
pedal. function is activated, activate the parking brake
The LED and indicator light go out. or engage the selector lever in position P when
the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator pedal under The hold function can be affected by the vehi‐
the following conditions: cle's load and the road incline. If needed, a
Check Control message will appear and position
▷ Drive-ready state switched on.
P will be selected automatically.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving it.

108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

Turn signal, high beams, Signaling briefly


Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
headlight flasher there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Turn signal
Malfunction
Turn signal in exterior mirror Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐
When driving and during operation of the turn cates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on High beams, headlight flasher
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Using turn signals

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

Press the lever past the resistance point. The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation


Wiper system
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
General information
The turn signal flashes three times.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
The function can be activated or deactivated.
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
Via iDrive: to become worn more quickly.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Safety information
3. "Lighting"
Warning
4. "Exterior lighting"
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
5. "One-touch turn signal"
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
6. Select the desired setting. may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
Settings are stored for the profile currently used. of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the

109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: press
ers are folded in when switching on. down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
NOTICE tion when released.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ Interval mode or rain sensor
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ Concept
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
Switching on
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.

Safety information

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance NOTICE


point. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once. accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released. Activating/deactivating

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the button on the wiper lever.


Wiping is started.
Press the lever down. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
down twice.

110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not


start. NOTICE
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically acti‐ a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
vated again. washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the
rain sensor Cleaning the windshield

Turn the thumbwheel. Pull the lever.


With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor shield and activates the wipers briefly.
sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain Windshield washer nozzles
sensor.
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain heated while standby state is switched on.
sensor.
Rear window wiper
Windshield washer system
Overview
Safety information

Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.

111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving

▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse


gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ NOTICE
tinuous operation. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
Clean the rear window tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, shield prior to switching the wipers on.
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its idle position when released.
Folding away the wipers
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
1. Switch standby state on and off again.
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its interval position when released. 2. In frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid
reservoir level is low. 3. Press the wiper lever up past the point of re‐
sistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
Fold-away position of the wipers until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical po‐
sition.
Concept 4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.

General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.

Safety information

Warning Folding down the wipers


If the wipers start moving in the folded away After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
state, body parts can be jammed or damage system must be reactivated.
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the shield.
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ 2. Switch on standby state.
ers are folded in when switching on. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐
ation.

112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving CONTROLS

Washer fluid
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
General information trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ system. There is a risk of damage to property.
voir. Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield mixing ratios provided on the containers.
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: Overview
0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
The washer fluid reservoir is located under the
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
hood.
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is Malfunction
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage correct readings at temperatures below
instructions on the washer fluid container. +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.

NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.

113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Displays
Vehicle features and options selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the

Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display. may differ from the way they are shown in this
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster Owner's Manual.

Overview

1 Onboard Computer  126 6 Trip odometer  122


2 Driver assistance systems 7 Driving Dynamics Control program  151
3 Speedometer 8 Range for electric driving  122
4 Drive-ready state indicator  101 9 Battery charge indicator  116
5 ECO PRO tips  207 10 Performance display  116

114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Selection list, such as for the radio  125 12 Range Extender fuel gauge  121
11 Range Extender range  122 13 Messages, for instance Check Control

Charging screen

1 Charging status  220 5 Range for electric driving  220


2 End of charging time  220 6 Charge state  116
Departure time with timer  221 7 Range Extender range  122
3 Maximum electrical range  220 8 With Range Extender: fuel gauge  121
4 Stationary climate control  221

Displaying the eDRIVE system ▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE.


▷ Drive-ready state: READY.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Concept
The display depends on the system's operating
condition. The following functions of the eDRIVE
system are shown in the instrument cluster
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator.
▷ Electric driving: ePOWER.

115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

High-voltage battery charge indicator ▷ Gray arrow: Range Extender deactivated.


▷ White arrow: Range Extender activated.

Performance display

Warning
Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage
battery is discharged, the high-voltage system The accelerator pedal indicator in the perform‐
is always still under high voltage. There is a risk ance display indicates the current efficiency of
of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change your driving style. The efficient range of the per‐
live parts, for instance orange high-voltage ca‐ formance display is colored blue.
bles, even when the batteries are discharged.
The gray ePOWER area shows the power that is
available.
The fill level bars indicate the available charge
state of the high-voltage battery when standby Accelerator pedal indicator in the CHARGE
state and drive-ready state are switched on. range, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by
coasting or when decelerating.
With a low range the color of the charge state in‐
dicator switches from blue to yellow. Accelerator pedal indicator in the ePOWER
range, arrow 2: display when accelerating.
In addition, the range for electric driving is dis‐
played. The available power may be reduced due to the
following factors:
▷ Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.
With Range Extender: maintaining charge
▷ Extreme external temperatures.
state
▷ When driving on steep inclines, with a sporty
driving style or in other high-power driving
conditions.
The gray ePOWER area is automatically ad‐
justed.
Optimizing the driving style, refer to page 200.

Drive-ready state: READY


The READY display indicates that
The arrow on the charge state indicator des‐
the vehicle is ready for driving.
ignates the Range Extender activation time. If
Drive-ready state in detail, refer to
Range Extender is activated, the current charge
page 101.
state of the high-voltage battery is maintained.

116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Indications on the Control Display Display

Consumption history

Displaying consumption history


Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol. The display shows the active components of the
eDRIVE system:
Display ▷ Blue: electrical energy.
▷ Arrow: direction of the energy flow.
▷ Segments of the high-voltage battery sym‐
bolize the charging state.
▷ The operating states, such as eDRIVE, are
displayed.
▷ Interior cooling/heating function switched on.

Energy distribution
Bars show the average consumption over a spe‐
General information
cific period of time, arrow 1.
Beside the current range, the display shows the
One bar indicates one minute.
energy distribution and the potential range if indi‐
The average consumption of the eDrive system vidual secondary functions are switched off.
is indicated by a line and a value above the bar
▷ Blue: electrical energy.
display, arrow 2. The indicated value is identical
to the average consumption in the Onboard ▷ White: activated secondary functions.
Computer and can be reset via the Onboard
Computer. Displaying energy distribution
Via iDrive:
Energy flow of the eDRIVE system
1. "My Vehicle"
Displaying the energy flow 2. "Technology in action"
Via iDrive: 3. "Comfort information"

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.

117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Check Control Have the vehicle checked immediately by a deal‐


er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in Parking brake
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems. The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
General information page 108.
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text Brake system
messages in the instrument cluster.
Braking system impaired. Continue to
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a drive moderately.
text message may appear on the Control Display.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another
Indicator/warning lights qualified service center or repair shop.

General information
Approach control warning
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐
and colors. ing is issued, for example when there is
the impending danger of a collision or
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state or standby state are activated. Increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐
Red lights nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐
Safety belt reminder ferential speed.
Safety belt on the driver's side is not Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐
buckled. For some country versions: pas‐ ver.
senger belt is not worn or objects are de‐
tected on the front passenger seat. Person warning
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt
If a collision with a detected person is im‐
on the driver or passenger side is not buckled.
minent, the symbol lights up and a signal
The safety belt reminder can also be activated if
sounds.
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly. Orange lights

Active Cruise Control


Airbag system
The number bars shows the selected
Airbag system and belt tensioner may distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
not be working.

118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Flat Tire Monitor FTM
ACC, refer to page 154.
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
been detected ahead of you. Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 140.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are
not adequate for the system to work. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The system was deactivated but applies the
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
brakes until the driver actively resumes control of
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or ac‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
celerator pedal.
formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
Yellow lights lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
The Brake Assistant function may not with the same radio frequency: after leaving
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the the area of the interference, the system auto‐
longer braking distance into account. matically becomes active again.
Have the system immediately checked ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
by a dealer's service center or another set the system again.
qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Control ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify dealer’s service center or another qualified
your driving style to the driving circumstances. service center or repair shop.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 137.
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service Steering system
center or another qualified service center or re‐ Steering system may not be working.
pair shop.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
DSC, refer to page 150. service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Emissions
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. ▷ The warning light lights up:
DSC, refer to page 150, and DTC, refer Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
to page 151. vehicle checked as soon as possible.

119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ Cruise control


cumstances:
The system is switched on. It maintains
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring the speed that was set using the control
in the engine. elements on the steering wheel.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
Blue lights
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
High beams
in particular the catalytic converter.
High beams are switched on.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
High beams, refer to page 109.
page 251.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive Hiding Check Control messages


Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐
vated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
Continuous display
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed. Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
Turn signal, refer to page 109.
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
Parking lights, headlight utively.
Parking lights or headlights are switched The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
on. onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight con‐
trol, refer to page 129.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
High-beam Assistant
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
High-beam Assistant is switched on. Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
High beams are switched on and off au‐ played again later.
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 131.

120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion


messages Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
Via iDrive: played again after standby state is switched off.

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status" With Range Extender: fuel
3. "Check Control" gauge
4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.

SMS text messages


The fill level bars indicate the available fuel sup‐
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
ply of the Range Extender when drive-ready
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
state and standby state are switched on.
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights. Additional range of the Range Extender on top of
pure electric range. If the Range Extender is acti‐
Supplementary SMS text messages vated, the color of the fill level bar indicator
Additional information, such as on the cause of switches from gray to white.
an error or the required action, can be called up Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
via Check Control. vary.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐ Follow the information on refueling.
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected. Coolant temperature
▷ "Owner's Manual"
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too
Display additional information about the hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual. A red indicator light is displayed.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another To check the coolant level, refer to page 248.
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "BMW i Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.

121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Odometer and trip odometer Safety information

Display Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Time
▷ Odometer, arrow 1, Scope of the Onboard The time is displayed in the Onboard Computer.
Computer. The time can be set on the Control Display.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Showing/resetting miles: TRIP


Range
General information
The expected range for the energy stored in the
high-voltage battery is displayed on the right side
of the instrument cluster next to the charge state
indicator of the high-voltage battery.
Always make sure that the range is sufficient for
the planned trip. The range is dynamic and can
abruptly change.
Press the button. The range can be abruptly reduced or increased
based on the following factors:
▷ With standby state switched off, the time, the
external temperature and the odometer are ▷ Driving style.
displayed. ▷ Traffic conditions.
▷ When standby state is switched on, the trip ▷ Program change via Driving Dynamics Con‐
odometer is reset. trol.
▷ Climate and terrain conditions.
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
External temperature ▷ After identification of a route through the nav‐
igation system depending on the route pro‐
General information file, route distance and selected speed.
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a ▷ When exiting a route or recalculating a route.
signal sounds. Further information about the topic Increasing
A Check Control message is displayed. the range, refer to page 206.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Check Control messages indicate a limited Display


range.
Detailed information on service
Heavily discharged high-voltage requirements
battery More information on the type of service required
The high-voltage battery is heav‐ may be displayed on the Control Display.
ily discharged. Its power output Via iDrive:
will be reduced. Heating and cli‐
mate control functions will be de‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
activated. In this state, the exact 2. "Vehicle status"
range can no longer be calculated. A short range 3. "Service required"
may still be available depending on the environ‐
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
mental conditions.
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
State of charge in strong temperature
fluctuations Symbols
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage bat‐ Symbols Description
tery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle No service is currently required.
again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge
vehicle with low state of charge in time.
The deadline for scheduled
With Range Extender maintenance or a legally man‐
The range of the Range Extender is displayed dated inspection is approaching.
separately next to the fuel gauge. The total range
The service deadline has already
can be displayed via the Onboard Computer. Ex‐
passed.
panding the range with Range Extender, refer to
page 106.
Entering appointment dates
Service requirements Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
Concept set correctly.
The function displays the service requirements
Via iDrive:
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
1. "My Vehicle"
General information 2. "Vehicle status"
The driving distance or the time to the next 3. "Service required"
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the 4. "Vehicle inspection"
instrument cluster after standby state is switched
on. 5. "Date:"

A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ 6. Select the desired setting.
ice requirements from your remote control.

123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Automatic Service Request traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
Overview
You can check when your dealer’s service center Camera
was notified.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"

Speed Limit Info The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
Speed Limit Info clean and clear.

Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum Switching on/off
permitted speed in the instrument cluster. Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
General information
2. "iDrive settings"
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well 3. "Displays"
as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs 4. "Instrument panel"
with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., 5. "Speed limit information"
are also detected and compared with the vehi‐
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
cle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor,
played on the Info Display in the instrument clus‐
and will be displayed depending on the situation.
ter.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also displays
speed limits present on routes without signs. Display

Safety information Speed Limit Info


Current speed limit.

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch

124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Speed Limit Info not available. buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel and the display in the instrument cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Phone redial.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
System limits It also displays programs of the Driving Dynamics
The system may not be fully functional and may Control.
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations: Activating a list and adjusting the
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. setting
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation 1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired
system are incorrect. setting.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ 2. Press the thumbwheel.


tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
Display
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
Selection lists tration.

General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing can be displayed or operated using the

125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Onboard Computer Selecting information


You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Concept
Display of the instrument cluster.
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
Via iDrive:
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Calling up information on the Info 3. "Displays"
Display
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.

Display in the instrument cluster


The information from the Onboard Computer is
shown in the upper left area of the instrument
cluster.

Information in detail
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
With Range Extender: total range
Information is displayed in the Info Display of the
instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐ The total range considers the
edly displays additional information. contents of the fuel tank as well
as the electric energy in the high-
voltage battery.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information in the Average consumption
Info Display: The average consumption is calculated on the
▷ Miles. basis of various distances. Periods when the ve‐
▷ With Range Extender: total range. hicle is parked with driveready state switched off
are not considered.
▷ Average consumption.
▷ Current consumption. Current consumption
▷ Average speed. Displays the current energy consumption. The
▷ External temperature. efficiency of the driving can be monitored.
▷ Time.
▷ Speed Limit Info. Average speed
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery as a Periods when the vehicle is parked with drive-
percentage. ready state switched off are not included when
calculating average speed.

126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Displays CONTROLS

Resetting average values Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip


computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer


Via iDrive:
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
1. "My Vehicle"
lever.
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
Speed Limit Info
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster. 5. "OK"

Display of charge state of the high- Resetting the trip computer


voltage battery as a percentage Via iDrive:
The current charge state of the high-voltage bat‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
tery can be displayed as a %-value.
2. "Driving information"

Onboard Computer on the Control 3. "Trip computer"


Display 4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
Concept ▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
cle data on the Control Display, such as average come to a standstill.
values. 5. If necessary, "OK"

General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available Speed warning
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the Concept
consumption, are displayed. The values can A speed limit can be set that when reached will
be reset individually. cause a warning to be issued.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a specific route and can be reset as General information
often as necessary.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Displays

Adjusting Information at a glance


Via iDrive:
Symbols Description
1. "My Vehicle"
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the
2. "Vehicle settings"
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
3. "Speed warning" page 140.
4. "Warning at:"
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
displayed. fer to page 137.
6. Press the Controller.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes‐
Activating/deactivating sages, refer to page 121.
Via iDrive:
"Service required": displaying
1. "My Vehicle" service requirements, refer to
2. "Vehicle settings" page 123.
3. "Speed warning" "Teleservice Call": Service Re‐
4. "Speed warning" quest.

Setting your current speed as the


speed warning
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"

Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status


Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"

128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Lights CONTROLS

Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function

Low beams.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Instrument lighting.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Parking lights, low beams and
served.
roadside parking lights
Overview General information
Position of switch: , ,
Switches in the vehicle If the driver's door is opened when standby state
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off.

Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
The light switch element is located next to the ready state.
steering wheel.
When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside
parking light, refer to page 129.
Symbol Function

Automatic headlight control. Low beams


Cornering light. Position of switch:

Lights off. The low beams illuminate when standby state is


switched on.
Daytime running lights.

Parking lights. Roadside parking light

Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Lights

Switching on Headlight courtesy delay feature

General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration


Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
With standby state switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for 2. "Vehicle settings"
approx. 2 seconds. 3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
Switching off 5. "Pathway lighting"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in 6. Set length of time.
the opposite direction. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.

Welcome lights and headlight


courtesy delay feature Automatic headlight control

Welcome lights Concept


The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
General information ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
ambient brightness, individual light functions may cipitation.
be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked. General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Activating/deactivating cause the lights to be switched on.
Position of switch: ,
Via iDrive: Activating
Position of switch:
1. "My Vehicle"
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
2. "Vehicle settings"
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting" System limits
5. "Welcome lights" The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
rently used. ing conditions.

130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Lights CONTROLS

For example, the sensors are unable to detect


fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
Adaptive headlight range
the lights on manually. control
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
Daytime running lights ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
General information
the road is optimized.
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
standby state is switched on. After standby state High-beam Assistant
is switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion . Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
Activating/deactivating participants early on and automatically switches
In some countries, daytime running lights are the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ situation.
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive: General information
1. "My Vehicle" The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
2. "Vehicle settings"
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
3. "Lighting" beams are not switched on by the system.
4. "Exterior lighting" The system responds to light from oncoming
5. Select the desired setting. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
Settings are stored for the profile currently used. bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Cornering light
Activating/deactivating
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or the use of
turn signals. Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press the button on the turn signal lever.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Lights

The indicator light in the instrument clus‐


ter is illuminated when the low beams are
Instrument lighting
switched on.
Functional requirement
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
The parking lights or low beams must be
tween low beams and high beams.
switched on to adjust the brightness.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system Adjusting
switches on the high beams.
Adjust the brightness with the
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when thumbwheel.
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 109.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.

System limits
Interior lights
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
General information
to use the high beams. In situation that require Depending on the equipment, the interior lights,
this, therefore switch off manually. footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights
are controlled automatically.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐ The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐
sary: trols brightness of some of these features.
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation. Overview
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
1 Interior lights
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with 2 Reading lights
stickers, etc.
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and


hold for approx. 3 seconds.

132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Lights CONTROLS

Switching the reading lights on/off


Press the button.

Reading lights are located in the front next to the


interior light.

Ambient light

General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.

Selecting the color scheme


Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in blue when vehi‐
cle is unlocked.

Setting the brightness


Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumb‐
wheel for the instrument lighting or on the Con‐
trol Display.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.

133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

Safety
Vehicle features and options selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag


2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbag


Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area.
equate protection.

134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

Head airbag the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag
protects the head. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
Ejection Mitigation son.

The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the senger side must stay clear - do not attach
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
pact events. devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
Knee airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Protective effect ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ other objects to the front passenger seat that
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear- are not specifically suited for seats with
end collisions. integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests.
airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
Warning
dashboard, and the seats.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
timum protective effect of the airbag system. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Customer Relations for further information.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the Warnings and information on the airbags are also
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as found on the sun visors.
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in

135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

Functional readiness of the airbag Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
system senger's side are activated or deactivated.

Safety information General information


Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
Warning structions for children on the front passenger
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ seat, see Children.
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components. Safety information

Warning
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
function, the system must be able to detect
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Malfunction of the automatic deactivation
system
Correct function When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
With the standby state switched on, the in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
warning light in the instrument cluster cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up briefly, indicating the airbag sys‐ lights up.
tem and belt tensioner are functional.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
Airbag system malfunctioning and the indicator light goes out.
▷ Warning light does not come on when If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
standby state is switched on. the person sit in the rear.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously. To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
Automatic deactivation of the front- ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
seat passenger airbags other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
Concept safe for use on the front passenger seat.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
ance. tem is to be installed on it.

136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

▷ Do not place objects under the seat that Strength of the driver's and front-seat
could press against the seat from below. passenger airbag
▷ No moisture in or on the seat. The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
Indicator light for the front-seat the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
passenger airbags To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
airbags indicates the operating state of the front-
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
seat passenger airbags.
ment.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated. A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly 1. Press the switch and move the respective
seated in a child restraint sys‐ seat all the way forward, until it stops.
tem or when the seat is
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
empty. The airbags on the
moves forward slightly.
front passenger side are not
activated. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for The calibration procedure is completed when the
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐ message on the Control Display disappears.
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ the calibration.
vated. If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
Detected child restraint systems possible.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure Concept
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
restraint system has been detected and the
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
more tires.

137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

General information All wheels green


Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ System is active and will issue a warning related
tion pressure and, depending on the model, the to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
tire temperature. last reset.
Further information and instructions on using the
system can also be found under Tire inflation One to four yellow wheels
pressure, refer to page 228. A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the Gray wheels
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
tire inflation pressure is not assured: losses.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was Possible causes:
performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Malfunction.
sure.
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, a reset was performed. Additional information
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. The status control display additionally shows the
current tire inflation pressures and, depending on
Status display the model, tire temperatures. The values shown
are instantaneous measurements and may vary
Current status depending on driving style or weather conditions.
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ Resetting the system
tive. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
The current status is displayed. off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
Tire conditions 6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
General information ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Tire and system status are indicated by the color Monitor…".
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
Control Display.
inflation pressures are accepted as reference val‐
ues. The reset is completed automatically while
driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and

138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

"Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for If the tire inflation pressure is low
recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you Message
continue the reset resumes automatically. A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
Messages
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
General information sage appears on the Control Display.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Symbol Possible cause
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Safety information
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system therefore issues a
Warning warning based on the tire inflation
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire pressures before the last reset.
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk Measure
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair the
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
flat tire or replace the wheel.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
If a tire inflation pressure check is 2. Identify the damaged wheel. Check the air
required pressure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a tire repair kit.
Message 3. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire re‐
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ pair kit or by changing the tire.
pears on the Control Display. If no tire repair kit is available, contact a dealer’s
Symbol Possible cause service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done. System limits
Inflation was not carried out according
to specifications. Temperature
The tire inflation pressure has fallen The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
below the level of the last confirma‐ temperature.
tion. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
Measure tion pressure.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
needed. tire temperature falls again.
2. Carry out a reset of the system after a tire These circumstances may cause a warning
change. when temperatures fall very sharply.

139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

Sudden tire pressure loss sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
damage caused by external circumstances. your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
Failure performing a reset
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
The system does not function properly if a reset pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐ tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
rect. ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
Malfunction that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
The yellow warning light flashes and is maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
then illuminated continuously. A Check to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
Control message is displayed. It may not inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
be possible to identify tire pressure losses. mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Examples and recommendations in the following TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
situations: system is not operating properly. The TPMS
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is malfunction indicator is combined with the low
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
ice center or another qualified service center malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
or repair shop as needed. mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐ subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
er’s service center or another qualified serv‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
ice center or repair shop. illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
set. Perform a system reset again. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices reasons, including the installation of replacement
with the same radio frequency: after leaving or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
matically becomes active again. ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ Concept
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, tween the individual wheels while driving.
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐

140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the Via iDrive:


diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
1. "My Vehicle"
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires. 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
Functional requirements 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following conditions must be met for the 6. Drive away.
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
The initialization is completed while driving,
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
The initialization automatically continues when
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
driving resumes.
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new Messages
value, an initialization was performed.
General information
Status display
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be bility Control is switched on, if needed.
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive: Safety information
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status" Warning
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
The status is displayed.
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair the
Initialization required flat tire or replace the wheel.
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ Indication of a flat tire
justed. A yellow warning light is illuminated in
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐


Performing initialization
sage appears on the Control Display.
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat Symbol Possible cause
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire There is a flat tire or a major loss in
inflation pressures. tire inflation pressure.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.

141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

Measure Safety information


1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Warning
vers.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Check the air driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
pressure in all four tires, for instance using and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
the tire pressure gage of a tire repair kit. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
3. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
changing the wheel. propriate.
If no tire repair kit is available, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop. Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
System limits stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
The system could be delayed or malfunction in to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
the following situations: or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in manner that is not consistent with their normal
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance. Overview
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ Button in the vehicle
face.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the Intelligent Safety button
driver assistance systems.
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
an imminent collision.
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
▷ Approach control warning with City light brak‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
ing function, refer to page 143.
gent Safety systems activate according to the
▷ Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer last setting.
to page 146.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

Press button briefly: General information


▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety The system warns at two levels of an imminent
system is displayed. The systems danger of collision at speeds from approx.
are individually switched off accord‐ 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary
ing to their respective settings. with the current driving situation.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective Braking is performed at speeds up to approxi‐
to their individual settings. mately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Adjust the settings as needed. Individual settings
are stored for the profile currently used. Detection range
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:


▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out. Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.

Approach control warning with Safety information


City light braking function
Warning
Concept The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
The system may prevent some accidents. In the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
pact speed. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
propriate.
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and ap‐
plies the brakes with limited force and duration. Warning

A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
trols the system. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
The approach control warning is available even if or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
cruise control has been deactivated. manner that is not consistent with their normal
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐ use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
tentionally, the approach control warning and style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ and actively intervene where appropriate.
tem reactions.

143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

Overview ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective


to their individual settings.
Button in the vehicle Adjust the settings as needed. The individual
settings are stored for the driver profile currently
in use.

Press button again:


▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are


switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Camera
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. 5. Select the desired setting.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror The selected time is stored for the driver profile
clean and clear. currently used.

Warning with braking function


Switching on/off
Display
Switching on automatically
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is
The system is automatically active after every imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
driving off. strument cluster.

Switching on/off manually


Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.

144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

Symbol Measure The system’s ability to detect objects may be


limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
Brake and increase distance. limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning. System limits
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary. Safety information

Prewarning Warning
This warning is provided, for instance when there The system is designed to operate in certain
is impending danger of a collision or the distance conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
to the vehicle ahead is too small. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
as warranted. of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
Acute warning with braking function er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
An acute warning is displayed when there is an tem’s operation and limitations.
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
Detection range
The driver must intervene actively when there is
The system's detection potential is limited.
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
sisted by a minor automatic braking intervention Thus, a system reaction might not come or
in a possible risk of collision. might come late.
Acute warnings may be provided even when The following situations may not be detected, for
there has been no prior warning. example:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
Braking intervention them at high speed.
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
During a warning, the maximum braking force is or sharply decelerating vehicles.
used. This requires the brake pedal to be de‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
pressed sufficiently quickly and forcefully. If there
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
is a risk of collision, the system may assist with
braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. Functional limitations
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
stability has not been restricted, for instance by lowing situations:
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by ▷ In tight curves.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
moving the steering wheel. activated, for instance DSC OFF.

145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror Detection range


is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
established.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐


The more sensitive the warning settings are, for ided into two areas:
example the warning time, the more warnings are ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ vehicle.
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
actions. of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
Daytime pedestrian collision within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
mitigation area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents with Safety information
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐ Warning
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
sion with pedestrians, and support this with a The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
light braking function. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
trols the system. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system is‐
sues a warning of a possible risk of collision with Warning
pedestrians in the speed range from approx.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
The system reacts to people who are within the to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
detection range of the system. or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

Overview ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective


to their individual settings.
Button in the vehicle Adjust the settings as needed. The individual
settings are stored for the driver profile currently
in use.

Press button again:


▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are


switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Camera
Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Intervene immediately by braking or make an
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror evasive maneuver.
clean and clear.
Braking intervention
Switching on/off The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
During a warning, the maximum braking force is
Switching on automatically used. This requires the brake pedal to be de‐
pressed sufficiently quickly and forcefully. If there
The system is automatically active after every
is a risk of collision, the system may assist with
driving off.
braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Switching on/off manually
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
Press button briefly: stability has not been restricted, for instance by
▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
system is displayed. The systems The braking intervention can be interrupted by
are individually switched off accord‐ stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
ing to their respective settings. moving the steering wheel.

147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Safety

The system’s ability to detect objects may be ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ shield is dirty or covered.
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the ▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
limitations of the system and actively intervene established.
as warranted.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
System limits
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
Safety information
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ Brake force display
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
Concept
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk
tem’s operation and limitations. of a rear-end collision.

General information
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ During normal braking or decelerating, the
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. top brake lights light up.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than ▷ During heavy brake application, the lower
32 in/80 cm. brake lights additionally light up.

Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may PostCrash – iBrake
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Concept
▷ In tight curves.
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF. vention by the driver in certain situations. This

148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Safety CONTROLS

can reduce the risk of a further collision and the


consequences thereof.

Harder vehicle braking


In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
by the automatic braking function. This interrupts
automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking


It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for example for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.

At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
matically.

149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Driving stability control systems


Vehicle features and options Energy recovery
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
General information
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily In the event of danger, such as with locked
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order to
selected options or country versions. This also prevent unstable driving situations.
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the Safety information
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Warning
Without energy recovery, there is no braking
Anti-lock Braking System ABS power of the electric motor available. The vehi‐
cle could roll further than anticipated. There is a
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
ing. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept
Brake assistant
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
engine speed and by applying brakes to the indi‐
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
vidual wheels.
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐ General information
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ABS. ditions, for instance:
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
for the duration of the emergency stop. ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 151, is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.

150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

Safety information Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic


Traction Control
Warning
Activating DTC
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Via iDrive:
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the 1. "My Vehicle"
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
2. "Traction control"
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic 3. "TRACTION"
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light
ate. lights up.

Deactivating DTC
Indicator/warning lights Via iDrive:
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
1. "My Vehicle"
the drive and braking forces.
2. "Traction control"
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned. 3. "DSC ON"
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light
go out.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control When drive-ready state is switched on, DTC is
automatically deactivated.
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Driving Dynamics Control
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
Concept
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune
what limited driving stability. the vehicle's settings and features. Various pro‐
grams can be selected for this purpose.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Overview
Drive carefully.
Button in the vehicle
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.

151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Operating the programs The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Driving Dynamics Control Program
ECO PRO+
i3s: SPORT
COMFORT Concept
ECO PRO ECO PRO+, refer to page 207, also limits the
ECO PRO+ maximum speed and reduces climate control
and lighting functions.
COMFORT Comfort functions and the engine management
are adjusted.
Concept
Activating ECO PRO+
For balanced tuning.
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
Activating COMFORT + is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Press the button repeatedly until COM‐


FORT is displayed in the instrument i3s: SPORT
cluster.
Concept
ECO PRO Sporty tuning of the steering and drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
Concept
Activating SPORT
ECO PRO, refer to page 207, provides consis‐
tent tuning to maximize range. Press the button repeatedly until
Comfort functions and the engine management SPORT is displayed in the instrument
are adjusted. cluster.

The program can be configured to individual


preferences. Displays

Activating ECO PRO Program selection


Press the button repeatedly until ECO Pressing the button displays a list
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐ of the selectable programs. De‐
ter. pending on your vehicle's optional
features, the list in the instrument
cluster can differ from the illustra‐
Configuring ECO PRO tion shown.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" Selected program


2. "Vehicle settings" The instrument cluster displays the selected pro‐
3. "Configure ECO PRO" gram.
4. Select the desired setting.

152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving programs


are shown in the instrument cluster. In addition,
the display on the automatic climate control
lights up.
i3s: the SPORT driving program is displayed in
the instrument cluster.

Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant


1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is
used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Depending on the settings, the cruise control
settings many change under certain conditions.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. Safety information
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Warning
selected options or country versions. This also
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
When using these functions and systems, the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
served.
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Camera-based cruise control closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
with Stop & Go function ACC
Concept Warning
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
the buttons on the steering wheel. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
The system maintains the desired speed on ing.
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
ates or brakes automatically. against rolling away, follow the following:
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ Set the parking brake.
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The turn the front wheels in the direction of the
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ curb.
lows.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective wheel chock.
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, Warning
the system is able to detect this within the given The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
system limits. or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
General information conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect tervene where appropriate.
vehicles driving ahead.

154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

Warning
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. clean and clear.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Functional requirements

Overview Speed range


The system is best used on well-constructed
Buttons on the steering wheel roads.
The desired speed can be set between
Button Function 20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h.

Cruise control on/off, interrupting, re‐ The system can also be activated when station‐
fer to page 155. ary.

Store/maintain speed, refer to Switching on/off and interrupting


page 156.
cruise control
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 157. Switching on
Adjust distance, refer to page 157. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Rocker switch: The indicator light in the instrument clus‐


Set speed, refer to page 156. ter lights up.

The current speed is adopted as the de‐


Camera sired speed and displayed next to the
A camera in the area of the interior mirror serves symbol in the Info Display.
to detect vehicles.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.

Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.

155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Press the button on the steering wheel. Setting the speed

▷ If active: press twice. Maintaining/storing the speed


▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.

Interrupting manually
Press the button on the steering wheel.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press


on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the When the system is switched on, the current
following situations: speed is maintained and stored as the desired
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. speed.

▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and permanently in the instrument cluster, re‐
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
fer to page 157.
vated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
necessary.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
The speed can also be stored by press‐
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
ing a button.
still.
Press the button.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipi‐
tation or glare effects from the sun. Changing the speed
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds
when the vehicle has been braked to a stop
by the system.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly


until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the


vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the ▷ When the system is switched off.
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h. Calling up the stored speed and distance
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
Press button with the system switched
the resistance point, the desired speed
on.
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Desired speed and distance are then continued
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
with these settings. The instrument cluster
action.
briefly displays the selected distance.

Adjusting the distance


Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Warning
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system The system does not react to traffic driving
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust of damage to property. Adjust the desired
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐ speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐ needed.
tance, possibly by braking.

Switching distance control off


Adjusting Distance control can be switched off and on
Press the button repeatedly until the when driving with cruise control activated.
desired distance is set. Press and hold this button.

The set distance is briefly displayed in


the left part of the instrument cluster. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.

Continuing cruise control To switch distance control back on, press button
again briefly.
General information After changing over distance control, a Check
An interrupted cruise control can be continued Control message is displayed.
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current Displays in the instrument cluster
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ Desired speed and stored speed
tional braking or accelerating may occur. The desired speed is displayed next to
In the following cases, the stored speed value is the symbol in the Info Display.
deleted and cannot be called up again:

157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the Flashing bar: the detected vehicle has
display indicates the desired speed. driven away.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐ ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate,
rupted, the display indicates the stored activate ACC by stepping on the accelerator
speed. pedal or pressing the RES button or the rocker
▷ No display: system is switched off. switch.

Status display Indicator/warning lights


Selected desired speed. Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
The system was deactivated but applies the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
brakes until you actively resume control by
rently fulfilled.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if
is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the necessary.
instrument cluster.
Distance display The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is deactivated because the
Distance 1 accelerator pedal is being pressed; a ve‐
hicle was not detected.

Distance 2
System limits

Distance 3 Detection range

Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.

Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of The detection capacity of the system and the
you. automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
Distance control is deactivated because
detected.
the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a
vehicle was detected.

158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

Deceleration Cornering
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
Swerving vehicles not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected


until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
When you approach a curve the system may
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
lected distance in certain situations, including if
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving After releasing the accelerator pedal the system
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐ is reactivated and controls speed independently.
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed. Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Weather Cruise control


The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
Concept
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
already recognized. The system maintains the desired speed. The
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ system accelerates and brakes automatically as
tions: needed.
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
General information
▷ Slush. Depending on the settings, the cruise control
settings many change under certain conditions.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare. Safety information
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
Warning
stance by braking, steering or evading.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Engine power driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
gine power is insufficient.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
Malfunction ate.
The system may be impaired when the detection
range of the radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate holder. Warning
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ The use of the system can lead to an increased
tem fails. risk of accidents in the following situations,
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ for instance:
lowing situations: ▷ On winding roads.
▷ When an object was not correctly detected. ▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
▷ In tight curves. conditions, or on a loose road surface.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
shield is dirty or covered. age to property. Only use the system if driving
▷ When driving toward bright lights. at constant speed is possible.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.

160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

Switching off
Warning
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
▷ If active: press twice.
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ ▷ If interrupted: press once.
tervene where appropriate. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.

Overview Interrupting manually


When active, press the button on the
Buttons on the steering wheel steering wheel.

Button Function
Interrupting automatically
Cruise control on/off, interrupting, re‐
fer to page 161. The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
Store speed, refer to page 161. ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
trol, refer to page 162.
vated.
Rocker switch: ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Set speed, refer to page 161.
Setting the speed
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control Maintaining/storing the speed

Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator light in the instrument clus‐


ter lights up.

The current speed is adopted as the de‐


sired speed and displayed next to the
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
symbol in the Info Display.
the system is interrupted.
Cruise control can be used.
When the system is switched on, the current
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if speed is maintained and stored as the desired
necessary. speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster.

161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if Continuing cruise control


necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ General information
ton. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
Press the button. by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
Changing the speed calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed


Press the button on the steering wheel.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set. The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road Displays in the instrument cluster
is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Indicator light
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
creases or decreases by approx.
ped, the indicator light in the instrument
1 mph/1 km/h.
cluster indicates whether the system is
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past switched on.
the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. Desired speed and stored speed
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ The desired speed is displayed next to
pends on the vehicle. the symbol in the Info Display.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance ▷ Display lights up green: system is ac‐
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ tive, the display indicates the desired
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on speed.
the accelerator pedal. ▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ rupted, the display indicates the stored
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the speed.
switch beyond the resistance point causes ▷ No display: system is switched off.
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

Status display Safety information


Selected desired speed.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
rently fulfilled.
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
System limits driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
Engine power ate.
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
gine power is insufficient.
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
PDC Park Distance Control Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Concept Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐ driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is is not yet active.
equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the
vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are
approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones Overview
and a display on the Control Display.
With front PDC: button in vehicle
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the following
situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐
ject. Park assistance button
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.

163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors Automatic deactivation during forward


Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, travel
for instance in the bumpers. The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually


Functional requirements
Press the park assistance button.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ▷ On: the LED lights up.
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
Switching on/off assistance button.

Switching on automatically Warning


The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations: Signal tones
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
drive-ready state is switched on. is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐
The rearview camera also switches on. ject is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obstacles signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
are detected behind or in front of the vehicle The shorter the distance to the object, the
by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. shorter the intervals.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. If the distance to a detected object is less than
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐ approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
stacles are detected on and off. Via iDrive: sounded.

1. "My Vehicle" With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐


cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an
2. "Vehicle settings"
alternating continuous signal is sounded.
3. "Parking"
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on lever position P is engaged.
the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation" Volume
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
rently used. entertainment volume can be adjusted.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation Via iDrive:
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
1. "My Vehicle"
washes, to reduce false alarms.
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"

164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

4. "Volume settings" er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐


5. "PDC" tem’s operation and limitations.

6. Set the desired value.


The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Limits of ultrasonic measurement
rently used. Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
Visual warning
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
The approach of the vehicle to an object is high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
farther away are already displayed on the Control ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
Display before a signal sounds. vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐
trol (PDC) is activated. ▷ With moving objects.
The range of the sensors is represented in the ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
colors green, yellow and red. ledges or cargo.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
played, the switch can be made to PDC: ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
2. "Rear view camera"
▷ If cargo protrudes.
System limits ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
Safety information sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.

Warning
False warnings
The system is designed to operate in certain
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
cle within the detection range:
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ In heavy rain.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.

165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

▷ When sensors are covered in snow. traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
▷ On rough road surfaces. tively intervene where appropriate.

▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.


▷ In large buildings with right angles and Overview
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages. Depending on the vehicle equipment:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. button in the vehicle
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
PDC activation on obstacle detection, for in‐
stance in automatic vehicle washes.

Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. Park assistance button

Red symbol is displayed, and the range


of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Camera
Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a


dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.

Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in The camera lens is located underneath the tail‐
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area gate.
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
play. necessary, clean the camera lens.

Safety information Switching on/off

Warning Switching on automatically


The system cannot serve as a substitute for the The system is automatically switched on if selec‐
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the tor lever position R is engaged when the drive-
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. ready state is switched on.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch

166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

Automatic deactivation during forward "Obstacle marking"


travel Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐
The system switches off when a certain driving hicle equipment.
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed. Pathway lines

Depending on the vehicle equipment:


switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.


▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display. Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Switching the view via iDrive Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
If the rearview camera view is not displayed, quired when parking and maneuvering on level
change the view via iDrive: roads.

1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
2. "Rear view camera"
ing wheel movements.
The rearview camera image is displayed.

Turning radius lines


Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer
power socket can lead to malfunctions.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
Activating assistance functions on the rearview camera image together with
More than one assistance function can be active pathway lines.
at the same time. Turning radius lines show the course of the
Move the Controller to the left, if needed. smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
▷ Parking aid lines Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
"Parking aid lines" steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking

167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where


the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacles


behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors and the rearview cam‐
era. Display settings
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the Brightness
rearview camera. With the rearview camera switched on:
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
2. Select the symbol.
Control.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines Contrast
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius With the rearview camera switched on:
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
space.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.

168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

The objects displayed on the Control Display The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate Park Distance Control.
the distance from the objects on the display.
The bumper of the vehicle is not visible in the Safety information
camera picture. Therefore do not drive closer to‐
ward an obstacle than shown by the marks in the
Warning
camera picture, even if the camera picture still
shows a gap between the vehicle and the obsta‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
cle. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
Parking assistant fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
Concept ate.

NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.

Also follow the safety information for PDC Park


This system assists the driver in parking parallel Distance Control.
to the road.
Overview
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three Button in the vehicle
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and during the parking procedure
takes control of steering, the acceleration and
Park assistance button
braking, and if needed, changes the gears. Press
and hold the park assistance button for the dura‐
tion of the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.

169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

Ultrasound sensors Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button


Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is


indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Switching on with reverse gear
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search is
Functional requirements indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality: Display on the Control Display
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers. System activated/deactivated
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Symbol Meaning
For measuring parking spaces Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. White: the system is available but not
22 mph/35 km/h. activated.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
The system is activated.
5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Parking space search and system status


▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released. ▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened. assistant is activated and the parking space
search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐

170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Driving comfort CONTROLS

hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is ▷ Press the park assistance button.
active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted. ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ the Control Display.
tive. Steering control has been
taken over by system. Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and takes over steering.
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
When the system is deactivated, the displays
surfaces.
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
Parking using the parking assistant overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
Parking pear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
1. Press the park assistance button or clearances that are too small.
shift into reverse gear to switch on the park‐ ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
ing assistant, refer to page 170. Activate the the time taken for parking is exceeded.
parking assistant, if needed.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Parking assistant is activated. Control Display.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of ▷ When the park assistance button is released.
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ If the tailgate is open.

The status of the parking space search and ▷ If doors are open.
possible parking spaces are displayed on the ▷ When setting the parking brake.
Control Display, refer to page 170. ▷ During acceleration.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ When braking.
play.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
Press and hold the park assistance button for
A Check Control message is displayed.
the duration of the parking procedure. At the
end of the parking procedure, the P selector
lever position is set.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
The end of the parking procedure is indicated
ued, if needed.
on the Control Display.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
page 170, and follow the instructions on the
needed.
Control Display.
Interrupting manually
Switching off
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time: The system can be switched off as follows:

171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Driving comfort

▷ Press the park assistance button. ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
System limits ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
Safety information ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
Warning fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ vehicles.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ With moving objects.
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ledges or cargo.
tem’s operation and limitations. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
No parking assistance
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
▷ If cargo protrudes.
in the following situations:
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
▷ In tight curves.
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
Functional limitations
sounds.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
lowing situations:
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel tected at all.
roads.
▷ On slippery ground. Malfunction
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the The parking assistant failed. Have the system
parking space. checked by a dealer's service center or another
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge qualified service center or repair shop.
of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement


Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.

172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Climate control CONTROLS

Climate control
Vehicle features and options ▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Depending on the equipment specification:
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
When using these functions and systems, the ▷ Parked-car ventilation.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.

Interior air quality


The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the
following components:

Air conditioner

1 Seat heating, left  90 2 Air conditioning

173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Climate control

3 Temperature 8 Rear window defroster


4 Air distribution, windows 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 Air distribution, upper body region 10 Seat heating, right  90
6 Air distribution, floor area 11 Air flow
7 Remove ice and condensation

Climate control functions in detail Cooling of the car's interior with the A/C button is
only possible with drive-ready state switched on.
Switching the system on/off
Switching on/off
Switching on Press the button.
Press any button except for the following: The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
▷ Rear window defroster. tioning switched on.
▷ Seat heating. Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
Switching off ready state is activated.
Press and hold the left button until the The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
control switches off. ter, refer to page 203, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Temperature
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the set
temperature. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
Adjusting suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature. Operation
To reduce energy consumption,
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
the cooling or heating output is
erating mode:
reduced or deactivated as per
ECO PRO mode, refer to page 207. ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of
Air conditioning outside air into the vehicle is permanently
blocked.
Concept To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ mode switches off automatically after a certain
humidified and, depending on the temperature amount of time, depending on the environmental
setting, warmed again. conditions.

174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Climate control CONTROLS

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Floor area.


ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases. You may combine these programs as needed.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed. To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted the windshield and the front side windows.
manually.
Switching on/off
Operation
Press the button.
Press the left or right side of the button: The LED is illuminated with the system
to decrease or increase air flow. switched on.
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest
level is active when five LEDs are lit. The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ If the windows are fogged over, you can also
duced automatically to save battery power. switch on the air conditioning to dehumidify the
air.
Adjusting the air distribution manually
Rear window defroster
Concept
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually. The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Operation
Press buttons repeatedly to select a program: Microfilter
▷ Windows. In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐
filter filters dust and pollen from the air.
▷ Upper body region. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 250.

175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Climate control

Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating, left  90 8 Remove ice and condensation


2 Air conditioning 9 Rear window defroster
3 Display 10 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
4 Temperature lated-air mode

5 Air distribution settings 11 Seat heating, right  90

6 AUTO program 12 Activated driving mode display  207

7 Maximum cooling 13 Air flow, AUTO intensity

Climate control functions in detail Temperature

Switching the system on/off Concept


The automatic climate control achieves the set
Switching on temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
Press any button except for the following: by using the maximum cooling or heating power,
and then keeps it constant.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating. Adjusting

Switching off Turn the wheel to set the desired


temperature.
Press and hold the left button until the
control switches off.

176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Climate control CONTROLS

The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ General information


play of the automatic climate control. The function is available above an external tem‐
The automatic climate control reaches this tem‐ perature of approximately 32 ℉/0 ℃ or the drive-
perature as quickly as possible, if needed, by in‐ ready state is available.
creasing the cooling or heating output, and then
keeps it constant. Switching on/off
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ Press the button.
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
The LED is illuminated with the system
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
switched on.
set temperature.
To reduce energy consumption, the cooling or Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
heating output is reduced or deactivated as per gion. The vents need to be open for this.
ECO-PRO mode, refer to page 207. If ECO PRO+, refer to page 207, is activated,
this function is deactivated.
Air conditioning The air flow can be adjusted with the program
active.
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ AUTO program
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again. Concept
The car's interior can be cooled with the station‐ The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
ary climate control or via the A/C button with the car's interior automatically.
drive-ready state activated.
The air distribution and temperature are control‐
led automatically depending on the temperature
Switching on/off
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
Press the button. setting including the selected intensity of the air
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ flow.
tioning switched on.
Switching on/off
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Press the button.
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is activated. The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program. Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
densation water, refer to page 203, develops ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐ windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
mal. The air conditioning, refer to page 177, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Maximum cooling gram.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Climate control

At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
densation as much as possible. nently blocked.
To switch off the program: press the button To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
again or manually adjust the air distribution. mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
Intensity conditions.
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button
control for the air flow and air distribution. to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure
that air can flow to the windshield.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase intensity.
Adjusting the air flow manually
The intensity level is indicated by LEDs.
Concept
Automatic recirculated-air control/ The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
recirculated-air mode manually.

Concept General information


The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐ To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air. program first.
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated. Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
General information
to decrease or increase air flow.
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest
automatically. level is active when five LEDs are lit.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ The air flow of the automatic climate control may
ously flows into the car's interior. be reduced automatically to save battery power.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window Adjusting the air distribution manually
fogging increases.
Concept
Switching on/off The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
Operation
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Press the button repeatedly to select a
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐ program:
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside
air and shuts off automatically. ▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.

178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Climate control CONTROLS

▷ Floor area.
Ventilation
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.

To defrost windows and remove ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
condensation vents continuously, arrows 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
Concept row 2.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Adjusting the ventilation
Switching on/off ▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Press the button. Adjust the vent so that the air is directed to‐
wards you, for instance when the vehicle is
The LED is illuminated with the system
too hot.
switched on.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
The air flow can be adjusted with the program Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO Stationary climate control
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Concept
Rear window defroster
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
Press the button. The LED lights up. interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
The rear window defroster switches off perature.
automatically after a certain period of time. The interior temperature is lowered with high
cooling output.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The system can heat the car's interior if needed.
Snow and ice can be removed more easily.
In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐
filter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen,
and gaseous pollutants out of the air. General information
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ The stationary climate control can be switched
nance, refer to page 250. on and off directly or via a preset departure time.
▷ Direct operation, refer to page 180.

179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Climate control

▷ Preselected departure times, refer to 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"


page 180. 4. "Activate comfort climate"
The stationary climate control can be switched 5. "Activate now"
on with the BMW Connected app, refer to
page 181.
Climate control for departure time
The air automatically exits through the vents to
the windshield, the side windows, the upper Concept
body region and into the floor area.
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
The system switches off automatically after a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
certain period of time. the time of departure.
If stationary climate control is used during the The activation time is automatically determined
charging process, less air conditioning capacity based on the temperature.
will be required while driving. This optimizes the
The system promptly switches on before the se‐
range.
lected departure time.

Functional requirements The departure time is preselected in two steps:

▷ Drive-ready state is deactivated. ▷ Set departure times.

▷ High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or ▷ Activate departure times.


charging cable connected.
General information
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
charged, it can take some time after connect‐ If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
ing the charging cable, until the stationary cli‐ be made on the Control Display. The departure
mate control will be functional. time change is a one-off change. Scheduled de‐
parture times are not adjusted. Settings for cli‐
▷ Departure time preselected: dependent on
mate control and charging process are also ap‐
the internal, external, and set desired temper‐
plied for scheduled departure times.
ature.
▷ Direct operation via iDrive: not dependent on Setting departure times
the external temperature.
▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out. Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
Switching on/off directly 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
Concept
4. "Activate comfort climate"
The system can be switched on or off directly.
5. "Plan comfort climate"
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. 6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 222.
Via iDrive
The system can be switched on or off via iDrive.

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"

180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Climate control CONTROLS

Activating the departure time

Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of the stationary climate control, the respec‐
tive departure time must be activated first.

Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
Activate the desired departure time.

Display
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the departure time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the stationary climate control has
been switched on.

Activating with the BMW Connected


app
Using an appropriate BMW Connected app with
remote function, the system can be switched on
directly or via a preset departure time.

181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Warning


cific and optional features offered with the series.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
It also describes features that are not necessarily
with the integrated universal remote control,
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
selected options or country versions. This also
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
When using these functions and systems, the
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
movement of the respective system is clear
served.
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
Integrated Universal Remote mitter.

Control
Compatibility
Concept If this symbol is printed on the packaging
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the or in the owner's manual of the system to
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of be controlled, the system is generally
remote-controlled systems such as garage door compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
drives, barriers, or lighting systems. Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
General information ▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ service center or repair shop.
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the Corporation.
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.

182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Interior equipment CONTROLS

Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held


mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ LED, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ Buttons, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on the ignition. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ peated programming, please check if the system
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐
green rapidly. This erases all programming of tem.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.

183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the desired button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the integrated universal remote control
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
remains nonoperational, continue with the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
special features for change code wireless
for the next step.
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the If the programming procedure is not completed,
programmed function will be carried out. the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition. Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror The operation of remote-controlled systems
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ with the integrated universal remote control,
lease the button. such as the garage door, may result in injury,
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. damage to property. Make sure that the area of
The required distance depends on the hand- movement of the respective system is clear
held transmitter. during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
mitter.
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ erated using the button on the interior mirror
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and while the engine is running or when the ignition
release the hand-held transmitter button for is started. To do this, hold down the button
2 seconds. within receiving range of the system until the
6. The LED can light up in different ways. function is activated. The interior mirror LED
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
ming procedure is completed. mitted.

Release the button.


Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.

184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Interior equipment CONTROLS

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ Operating concept
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
Various functions can be called up by pressing
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
the control button with a pointed object, such as
flashes green rapidly.
the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The
following setting options are displayed in succes‐
sion, depending on how long the control button
Digital compass is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
Overview
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering set‐
ting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones


Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle
so that the compass operates correctly; refer to
1 Control button World map with compass zones.
2 Mirror display

Mirror display
The point of the compass in the mirror indicates
the direction in which you are driving.

185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic ob‐
3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set com‐ jects or overhead power lines near the vehicle
pass zone appears in the mirror. and that there is sufficient room to drive
2. To change the zone setting, press the control around in a circle.
button quickly and repeatedly until the num‐ 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
ber of the compass zone that corresponds 3. Press and hold the control button for approx.
with your location appears in the mirror. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ display. Next, drive in a complete circle at
pass is ready for use again after approximately least once at a speed of no more than
10 seconds. 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the
"C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.

▷ The point of the compass displayed does not


change despite changing the direction of Setting the language
travel. Press and hold the control button for approx. 12
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed. to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button
again to switch between English "E" and German
"O".

186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Interior equipment CONTROLS

Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
mately 10 seconds. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
Sun visor
Glare shield NOTICE
Fold the sun visor down or up. If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
Vanity mirror to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. Depending on the equipment version,
the mirror lighting may switch on when the cover Overview
is opened.

Ashtray/Cigarette lighter
Ashtray

Overview

The cigarette lighter is located between the front


seats.

Push in the cigarette lighter.


The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.

The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.

Sockets
Emptying
Take out the insert. General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Cigarette lighter electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
Warning The total load of all sockets must not exceed
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot 140 watts at 12 volts.
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette patible connectors.
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐

187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

Safety information Between the front seats

Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
The socket is located between the front seats.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can In the cargo area
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can The socket is located on the right side in the
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage cargo area. Remove the cover.
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.

USB interface
Front center console
Concept
Mobile devices with a USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.

General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 56.

The socket is located underneath the dashboard.


Remove the cover.

188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Interior equipment CONTROLS

Overview on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐


anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charge current via the USB inter‐
face if the device supports this. At higher
temperatures, the charge current through the
USB storage device may be reduced.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
The USB interface is located between the front
seats. ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
Properties: USB storage device, refer to the owner's
▷ USB port Type A. manual of the device.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data Non-compatible USB media:
transfer. ▷ USB hard drives.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A. ▷ USB hubs.
Second USB port in vehicles with wireless ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
charging tray: ▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
▷ USB port Type C. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. Cargo area
Connecting an external device Cargo cover
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ General information
tor into the USB interface. The cargo cover is raised when the tailgate is
opened.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
Safety information
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be Warning
guaranteed that every device is operable on Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
the vehicle. tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐ can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
treme environmental conditions, such as very ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
high temperatures; refer to the owner's during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
manual of the device. a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices

▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐


niques, proper playback of the media stored

189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

with a cable connection to the vehicle in the


car's interior. Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
Ejecting
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate. or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
2. Raise the cover and pull it back to remove. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.

Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐
rest while driving may occur due to uninten‐
tional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by
the straps. There is a risk of injury. Do not fas‐
ten any objects to the straps for unlocking the
rear backrests.
Installing
1. Place the cover in the brackets.
2. Attach the retaining straps. Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
Enlarging the cargo area ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
Concept There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
the rear seat backrest or moving it into the cargo
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
position.
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
General information If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 50 straints or remove them.
to 50.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
the rear or from the cargo area. NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
Safety information down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
Warning movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.

190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Interior equipment CONTROLS

Folding down the rear seat backrest from ment in two different stages is possible as
the rear needed.
1. Insert the safety belt into the buckle.
Adjusting
1. Pull the strap.

2. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat back‐


rest as required.
3. Engage the rear seat backrest. The red mark
on the front strap disappears.

Folding back the backrest


1. Insert the safety belt into the buckle.

3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from


the cargo area
1. Pull corresponding strap.

2. Pull the strap.

2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

Cargo position

Concept 3. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The rear


The rear seat backrests can be moved into an seat backrest first engages in the loading po‐
upright loading position individually. An adjust‐ sition.

191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Interior equipment

4. Pull the strap again.


5. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
The red mark on the front strap disappears.

192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Storage compartments CONTROLS

Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 193.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Trays between the front seats, refer to
cific and optional features offered with the series. page 194.
It also describes features that are not necessarily ▷ Compartments in the front doors, refer to
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the page 195.
selected options or country versions. This also ▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 196.
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
▷ Rear seat, refer to page 195.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area, re‐
served. fer to page 196.

Safety information Glove compartment


Front passenger side
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ Safety information
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
Warning
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the partment can be thrown into the car's interior
car's interior. while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to Opening
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Tensioning strap at the front of the floor area
between the driver's seat and the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to page 195. Press the button.

193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Storage compartments

Closing the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a


Fold cover closed. risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Locking
Do not transport hot beverages.
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment. Overview
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.

Between the front seats


Center armrest

Open/tilt Between the seats.


A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Receptacle for cup holder

To open, press button, arrow 1.


There is a receptacle for the cup holder between
To open, press button, arrow 2. the seats.

Front cup holder

Safety information

Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled There are three receptacles for the cup holder
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions between the seats.
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage

194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Storage compartments CONTROLS

Inserting a cup holder Safety information


Insert a cup holder into the receptacle for the
cup holder in the storage compartment or into Warning
one of the front receptacles.
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
Removing a cup holder
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.

Rear seat
Tilt the cup holder forward slightly, pulling it up at
the same time. Rear cup holder

Safety information
Storage compartment
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
There is a storage compartment between the
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
seats.
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Tensioning strap
In the floor area between the driver's seat and
the front passenger seat, there is a tensioning
strap for fastening smaller objects.

Compartments in the doors


General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.

195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
CONTROLS Storage compartments

Overview Storage compartments in the


cargo area
Tensioning strap
A tensioning strap is available on the right and
left side trim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area


To secure the cargo, refer to page 205, there
Between the seats. are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Clothes hooks
Safety information

Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.

General information
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the
rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on the
top edge of the clothes hooks.

196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Storage compartments CONTROLS

197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 200
Loading ..................................................................................................... 204
Increasing the range ............................................................................... 206

199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving


Vehicle features and options full performance, are preset depending on the
system and take place automatically.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. Tires
It also describes features that are not necessarily Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
selected options or country versions. This also achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
applies to safety-related functions and systems. time.
When using these functions and systems, the Drive conservatively for the first
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 200 miles/300 km.
served.
Brake system
Breaking-in period Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together Following part replacement
smoothly.
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ served if any of the components mentioned
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Safety information

Warning
Using eDRIVE efficiently
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
Concept
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driving
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ utilizes energy consumption and energy recovery
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ optimally. Energy recovery is used to charge the
serve the break-in procedures of the respective high-voltage battery. Energy recovery is impor‐
parts and components. tant for the supply of electrical components and
thus a prerequisite for a long range. Energy con‐
sumption and recovery depend very much,
Range Extender among other things, on your driving style.
The full performance of the Range Extender is
available after a brief operating period and is only Optimizing driving style
minimally restricted during the run-in phase.
Control of the Range Extender during and after Performance display
the run-in phase, as well as the activation of the Your driving style can be optimized using the
performance display.

200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

connect the vehicle to a charging station at a


compatible charging location. If necessary, the
high-voltage battery will be charged automati‐
cally. Make sure that charging is carried out.
Regularly check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
prox. 80 %.

The energy recovery occurs during coasting and


braking and is displayed in the performance dis‐
play by the accelerator pedal indicator. General driving notes
The accelerator pedal indicator is within the
CHARGE range. Closing the tailgate
Efficient energy recovery:
Safety information
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the left within
the blue range of the CHARGE display, ar‐
row 1. Warning
▷ The energy use while driving can be opti‐ An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
mized by efficient acceleration. can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
Efficient acceleration: ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the right
addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
within the blue range of the ePOWER display,
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
arrow 2.
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
▷ Use deceleration by coasting as often as pos‐
sible for energy recovery.
Driving with the tailgate open
Discharge of the high-voltage battery If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
General information ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Longer idle periods, refer to page 264, can re‐ ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐ ▷ Drive moderately.
tery.
Hot exhaust gas system
Safety information
Warning
NOTICE
During driving operation, high temperatures can
The high-voltage battery can be damaged by occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
to property. Before storing the vehicle for an ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
extended period, ensure that the high-voltage contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
battery is fully charged. During the idle period, tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk

201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not Safety information


remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with NOTICE
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
gas system. ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Mobile communication devices in the mum indicated water level and the maximum
vehicle speed for driving through water.

Warning Braking safely


Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to General information
the transmission operations of mobile phones. The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to feature.
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
only mobile phones with direct connections to
quire such.
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
car's interior. obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active
Hydroplaning mode.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can In certain situations, for instance when coasting,
form between the tires and road surface. the accelerator pedal can be used for decelerat‐
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. ing, refer to page 105.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
contact between the tires and the road surface, discs can emit functional noises. Functional
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and noises have no effect on the performance and
brake the vehicle. operational reliability of the brake.

Driving through water Objects in the movement area around


pedals and floor area
General information
When driving through water, follow the following: Warning
▷ Drive through calm water only. Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
than a maximum of 9.8 inches/25 cm. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose

202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ generally this cannot be corrected.
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning. Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
Hills When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
General information neath the vehicle.
On downhill sections, use energy recovery if
possible to decelerate the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Safety information
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
Warning wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and tion.
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.

Warning
In idle state or with drive-ready state switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not availa‐
ble at all. There is a risk of accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with drive-ready state
switched off.

Brake disc corrosion


Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.

203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS Loading

Loading
Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. rest while driving may occur due to uninten‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily tional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the the straps. There is a risk of injury. Do not fas‐
selected options or country versions. This also ten any objects to the straps for unlocking the
applies to safety-related functions and systems. rear backrests.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
Safety information thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
Warning secure objects and cargo properly.
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
NOTICE
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
changing the steering response. There is a risk There is a risk of damage to property. Make
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.
NOTICE
When the cargo floor panel is not inserted,
Warning there can be damage to the engine cover when
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ loading the cargo area. There is a risk of dam‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, age to property. Only load the cargo area if the
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐ cargo floor panel is inserted.
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.

204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Loading DRIVING TIPS

Steps for Determining Correct The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight Stowing and securing cargo
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. ▷ Do not exceed permissible rear axle load.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
hicle.
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver passenger seat backrests.
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
4. The resulting figure equals the available occupied, secure each of the safety belts in
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. the opposite buckle.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
stow large cargo.
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) backrests.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage ▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with ratchet
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That straps or draw straps.
weight may not safely exceed the available ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in straps.
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐ Lashing eyes in the cargo area
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for


securing cargo.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of


the occupants and the cargo.

205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS Increasing the range

Increasing the range


General information Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
The vehicle contains comprehensive technolo‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
gies for reducing energy consumption and for pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
maximizing the range. ing on a long trip.
The range depends on a number of different fac‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
tors. sistance and thus raises energy consumption
The implementation of certain measures, driving and tire wear.
style and regular maintenance can increasing the
range and thereby also reduce the environmental
impact. Stationary climate control
Run advance climate control, refer to page 179,
Remove unnecessary cargo in the vehicle during charging before driving off.
Heating and cooling operations are very energy
Additional weight reduces the range. intensive and substantially reduce the electric
range.

Remove attached parts


following use Look well ahead when driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Driving smoothly and proactively reduces energy
namics and increase the energy consumption. consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
Close the windows and glass driving ahead of you.
sunroof Longer braking procedures result in more effi‐
cient charging of the high-voltage battery via en‐
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open ergy recovery from braking.
results in increased air resistance and thereby re‐
duces the range.
Use accelerator pedal for
Tires deceleration and coasting
When approaching a red light, use accelerator
General information pedal for decelerating.
Tires can affect energy consumption in various For going downhill use coasting function; for this
ways, for instance energy consumption can be purpose, press accelerator pedal just enough
influenced by tire size. that the vehicle rolls.

206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Increasing the range DRIVING TIPS

Switch off any functions that are ECO PRO


▷ Reduction of the heating output and switch-
not currently needed on duration for exterior mirrors, rear window,
and seat heating.
Functions such as the rear window defroster re‐
quire a lot of energy and reduce the range, espe‐ ▷ Reduction of the cooling or heating output of
cially in city and stop-and-go traffic. the air conditioner.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed. ▷ The speed is limited to an adjustable maxi‐
mum value between 50 mph/80 km/h and
The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving modes
80 mph/130 km/h. To intentionally exceed
support the energy-conserving use of comfort
the speed limit, press the accelerator pedal all
features. They automatically perform a partial or
the way down.
complete deactivation of these functions.
ECO PRO+
Have maintenance carried out The cooling and heating output of the air condi‐
tioner are additionally deactivated on ECO PRO+
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve activation.
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW The low beams are dimmed.
recommends that maintenance work be per‐ The maximum speed is limited to
formed by a BMW service center. 55 mph/90 km/h. In special situations, the speed
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ limit can be consciously exceeded by applying
tem, refer to page 250. the accelerator pedal.

Activating ECO PRO and ECO PRO+


ECO PRO and ECO PRO+
Press the button repeatedly, until ECO
PRO or ECO PRO+ is displayed in the
Concept instrument cluster.
ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ support an efficient
driving style. To this end, the control of the drive
is optimized for moderate acceleration, and
Configuring ECO PRO
adapted to lighting and comfort features, such as
climate control output. Some vehicle functions Via the Driving Dynamics Control
cannot be used during activated driving mode 1. Activate ECO PRO.
ECO PRO and ECO PRO+. 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are dis‐ 3. Select the desired setting.
played to assist with an efficient driving style.
Via iDrive
General information 1. "My Vehicle"
ECO PRO mode and ECO PRO+ mode each
2. "Vehicle settings"
have different settings.
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
4. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
DRIVING TIPS Increasing the range

Activating/deactivating the functions Display in the instrument cluster


The following functions can be activated/deacti‐
vated: ECO PRO efficiency display
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.

ECO PRO limit


▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of A mark in the performance display provides infor‐
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. mation about the current driving style.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed: Mark in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: indication
"Limit at:" for energy recovery and braking.
Select the desired speed. Mark in the ePOWER area, arrow 2: indicates ac‐
celeration.
ECO PRO climate control The efficiency of your driving style is shown by
To activate ECO PRO climate control: the bar's color:

"ECO PRO climate control" ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as
the mark moves within the blue range.
Climate control is set to be efficient.
▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for instance
This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from by accelerating more moderately.
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐ The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
tion. for efficient driving are met.

In addition, the power output of the seat and mir‐


ror heating is reduced. ECO PRO Tip

Coasting Driving tip


With little pressure on the accelerator pedal, the As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
vehicle can coast without energy recovery. The driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving
accelerator pedal indicator in the instrument dis‐ tips are displayed as a symbol in the instrument
play is centered between CHARGE and ePO‐ cluster.
WER during coasting.
Symbols
ECO PRO potential savings An additional symbol and a delete text message
Shows potential savings with the current settings are displayed on the control display.
in percentages.

208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Increasing the range DRIVING TIPS

Symbol Measure Calling up ECO PRO Driving style


analysis
For efficient driving, accelerate more
moderately or decelerate proactively Via iDrive:
to allow time to assess road condi‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
tions.
2. "Technology in action"
Reduce speed to the selected ECO 3. "Driving style analysis"
PRO speed.
Display on the Control Display
Indications on the Control Display

General information
Information on consumption and technology can
be displayed while driving.

eDRIVE
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" The display of the ECO PRO Driving style analy‐
2. "Technology in action" sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup
table.
3. "eDRIVE"
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient your driving style, the
Driving style analysis smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1.

Concept The table of values contains stars, arrow 2. The


more efficient the driving style, the more stars
In this situation, the function helps develop an are displayed in the table.
especially efficient driving style and to save en‐
ergy. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. of stars are displayed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Increas‐
ing the range, refer to page 206.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style.

Functional requirement
The function is available in ECO PRO mode and
in ECO PRO+ mode.

209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ............................................................................... 212
Refueling ................................................................................................... 223
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 226
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 228
Under the hood ........................................................................................ 244
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 246
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 248
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 250
Replacing components .......................................................................... 252
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 255
Care ........................................................................................................... 260

211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Charging the vehicle


Vehicle features and options ▷ Charging via a DC charging station.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
cific and optional features offered with the series. For optimal use of the energy from the power
It also describes features that are not necessarily grid, charging at a Level 2 charging station, such
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the as BMW i Wallbox, is recommended.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Charge current
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ General information
served.
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
Concept The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐
imum permissible charge current strength of the
The vehicle can be charged using various charg‐ power grid during charging via a household
ing cables at charging stations or household socket or charging station.
sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging
process are handled completely automatically. Level 1 charging
The charge current strength can be set via Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
iDrive. household socket, or at other household sock‐
ets, the permitted charge current strength must
be determined by a qualified electrician, for ex‐
General information ample.
The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
High-voltage battery ing, refer to page 219, can be adjusted in the ve‐
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy hicle in three levels.
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charg‐
charged by energy recovery during the trip or via ing is set to the lowest level.
the power grid. Depending on the country-specific version, one
In order to operate the high-voltage battery opti‐ of several ampere ratings is printed on the
mally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the
a compatible charger. limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if
When charging via the power grid, you can chose the charge current is set to the highest level. De‐
between the following variants. pending on the charging cable, the charge cur‐
rent strength may vary when lower levels are set.
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.
▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐
tion.

212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"

6A 6A 6A 6A

8A 8A 6A 6A

10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6A

12 A 12 A 9A 6A

15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Charging at a Level 2 charging station Safety information


The permitted charge current strength must be
determined prior to charging at a Level 2 charg‐
ing station, for instance from the operator of the Warning
Level 2 charging station. The permitted charge
Improper working with electrical current can
current strength can vary by country.
lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or
The charge current strength for Level 2 charg‐ high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to
ing, refer to page 219, can be adjusted in the ve‐ life. Observe the general safety regulations
hicle in two steps. when working with electrical current.
At delivery, the charge current for Level 2 charg‐
ing is set to "Reduced". Maintain this setting un‐
less it was verified that a higher charge current Warning
strength is permitted in the individual case.
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging de‐
The charge current changes depending on the vice at the charging location can cause damage
setting. to the vehicle and overload the power mains at
"Max." "Reduced" the charging location. There is a risk of fire and
a risk of injury.
32 A 16 A
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
Depending on the charge current, the charging tion, you have the compatibility of the following
duration changes. components confirmed:
▷ Charging cable.
Range Extender
▷ Charging station.
With Range Extender switched on, the current
▷ Household socket and connected circuits.
charge state can be maintained. In this way, a
higher range is achieved.

213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Safety information
Warning
Damaged or worn charging devices, for in‐ Warning
stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a
risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are Non-compatible charging cables or unsuitable
in good condition. charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐
age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use
charging cables or charging stations for charg‐
ing that are suitable for the respective vehicle
Warning type.
Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a A dealer's service center will be glad to provide
risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from information about suitable charging cables.
easily flammable materials is not maintained.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and
charge it simultaneously. Warning
Improper use of the charging cable can prevent
charging and lead to damage, for instance ca‐
ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging
Warning
cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not
Contact with live components can lead to an extend it using cables or adapters.
electric shock. High voltage is present at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
Warning
Have work on the charging connection, for in‐
stance cleaning, performed by an authorized Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead
BMW i dealer's service center or another quali‐ to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a
fied service center or repair shop. risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables
only.

Charging cable Level 1 charging cable


The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging
General information cable.

Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge
cable or the permanently installed charging cable the vehicle from grounded household sockets.
of a charging station to charge the vehicle. Charging at household socket connections is
performed with alternating current.
Different charging cables can be required de‐
pending on the country. When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the effi‐
ciency values may differ from those stated on the
energy label.

Level 2 charging cable


The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to
quickly recharge at sockets of designated
Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.

214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Charging is performed with alternating current at Keep the charging socket flap closed when the
designated Level 2 charging stations. The charg‐ charging socket is not used.
ing process can be completed faster than at
household sockets. Connecting the charging cable
The charging cable may be permanently installed To connect, engage selector lever position P,
at the charging station. deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐
If a Level 2 charging cable is used, apply the cor‐ cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
responding setting via iDrive, refer to page 219. 1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.

DC charging cable
The DC charging cable that is permanently in‐
stalled at the charging station makes is possible
to charge at DC charging stations. Charging is
performed with direct current at designated DC
charging stations. At the higher capacity current
connection of a DC charger station the charging
time is significantly lower than with a household
socket or a Level 2 charging station.
2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
During charging at a DC charging station, an indi‐
cation in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 220, is displayed.
The DC charging cable is also referred to as
Level 3 DC charging cable.

Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in the
charging cable compartment under the hood.
The Level 2 charging cable can be stored in the 3. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug,
same place. if needed.
Moisture can penetrate into the charging cable 4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
compartment, for instance in a vehicle wash. household socket or Level 2 charging cable
If required, store the charging cable with the in‐ to the port on the charging station.
stalled plug cover to prevent moisture in the 5. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug,
charging cable plug. and push it in until it engages.
When charging at a charging station, follow the
Connecting instructions at the charging station.

Charging socket flap


Removing
The charging socket flap is located on the right
When the charging process is active and the ve‐
side of the vehicle.
hicle is locked, the charging cable is automati‐
Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐ cally locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing
structed. the cable.

215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

When the charging process is completed, the Electrical unlocking of the charging
charging cable is automatically unlocked. cable
If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐
ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance Concept
from snow, before removing it.
The charging cable is unlocked electrically after
1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is charging is complete so that the charging cable
locked. can be pulled off even if the vehicle is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
Unlocking
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the Via iDrive:
gripping areas. 1. "My Vehicle"
Charging process is interrupted. 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Unlock charging cable"

Manual release
General information
The charging socket flap is automatically locked
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐ while driving.
ing socket, arrow 2. The charging cable may be locked during the
4. Put the charging socket lid back on. charging process if the vehicle is locked.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐


gages.
Manually unlocking the charging
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
socket flap
needed. In case of an electrical malfunction of the charg‐
ing cable lock, the charging socket flap can be
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
manually unlocked.
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
from the port on the charging station as appli‐ 1. Open the front door on the side of the charg‐
cable. ing socket flap.
8. Stow the charging cable. 2. Open rear door on the side of the charging
At a charging station, insert the permanently socket flap.
installed charging cable in the place provided 3. Remove the cover.
for it.

216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

4. Pull the top knob. This releases the charg‐ qualified service center or repair shop after emer‐
ing socket flap. gency unlocking of the charging cable.

Charging process
General information
At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery is
initially cooled. There may be a delay before
charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is dis‐
charged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may
5. If necessary, press the knob back into the ini‐ not be possible. The charging process cannot be
tial position. started.
If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high
Emergency unlocking temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charging rupt the charging process. Charging will resume
cable can be manually unlocked. automatically.

When charging at a charging station, complete The charging process may take longer under ex‐
the charging process at the charging station be‐ tremely low or high temperatures.
fore unlocking the charging cable.
Safety information
1. Open the front door on the side of the charg‐
ing socket flap.
Warning
2. Open rear door on the side of the charging
socket flap. Improper use of the power mains connection
can lead to damage, for instance cable fire.
3. Remove the cover.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
4. Pull the lower knob. property. Use the charging cable only for charg‐
The charging cable is manually unlocked. ing the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca‐
bles or adapters.

Warning
If the charge current strength is adjusted incor‐
rectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
5. For removing the charging cable, refer to on household sockets. With unknown power
page 215. networks, set on the lowest level.
6. If necessary, press the knob back into the ini‐
tial position.
Have the locking system of the charging socket
checked at the dealer’s service center or another

217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Starting the charging process Light Charging status


1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
Flashes Charging process is active.
parking brake, if needed.
blue
2. For planning the charging process, refer to
page 218. Flashes red Fault in the charging process.

3. Switch off drive-ready state. Green Charging process is completed.


4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light
to the port on the charging station. goes out after some time.
5. Open the charging socket flap. When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indicator
6. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle, re‐ light flashes continuously. The other indicator
fer to page 215. lights go out after some time.

7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Press the button on the remote control to


check the charging state. The charging status is
indicated on the indicator light. In some cases
Charging status display the vehicle is locked.

Indicator light on the charging socket Additional messages about the charging status
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the
BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐
nected app on a smartphone.

Planning the charging process

General information
The charging process can be adapted to con‐
straints, for instance the cost of electricity. The
vehicle can control the charging process in such
An indicator light is located on the charging
a way that the charging process is completed at
socket.
the departure time. A departure time must be set
for this purpose, refer to page 221.
Charging status The following settings are available:
▷ Immediate charging.
Light Charging status
▷ Set time window for favorable charging.
White Charging cable can be con‐ ▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable.
nected or removed.
▷ Set charging via a Level 2 charging cable.
Flashes yel‐ Charging process is being pre‐ If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
low pared. be made via iDrive. The departure time change is
For DC charging: DC charging is a one-off change. Scheduled departure times are
finishing. not adjusted. Settings for the stationary climate
control and charging process are also accepted
Blue Charging process paused.
for planned departure times.

218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Immediate charging Setting the charge current for charging


The charging process starts as soon as the via a Level 1 charging cable
charging cable is connected. Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
Via iDrive: must be charged with a different charge current
strength, refer to page 212.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Charge immediately"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
Setting the time window for favorable- 3. "Settings charging current"
rate Settings are stored. When you change charging
Level 1 or Level 2 charging: locations you also might need to change the set‐
If a departure time is set, a time window for ting for charging.
charging with a favorable electricity rate can be Set the charge current strength at other house‐
set via iDrive. hold sockets to the lowest level.
Via iDrive:
Setting the charge current for charging
1. "My Vehicle" via a Level 2 charging cable
2. "Plan charging/climate control" Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
3. "Charge for departure time" must be charged with a different charge current
4. "Set low cost time slot" strength, refer to page 213.

5. Set rate begin. When charging with a Level 2 charging cable, the
charging process can be completed faster at a
6. Set rate end.
Level 2 charging station.
The Digital Charging Service enables the time
Via iDrive:
window to be set automatically for certain loca‐
tions. Further information about the Digital 1. "My Vehicle"
Charging Service is available on the Internet: 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
https://charging.bmwgroup.com 3. "Level 2 (208-240V)"
The vehicle can also start the charging process Settings are stored. When you change charging
before the selected time window begins or end it locations you also might need to change the set‐
after the selected time window finishes. The ting for charging.
starting point of the charging process is adjusted
so the vehicle can be fully charged and, if appli‐ Automatically unlocking the charging
cable, its climate adjusted by the departure time.
cable after the charging process
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
To allow other charging station customers to use
be made via iDrive.
the charging function, the charging cable can be
The set time window can be ignored for the next unlocked automatically after the charging proc‐
charging process: "Charge immediately once" ess is complete.
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"

219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

3. "Settings charging current" General information


4. "Unlock charging cable" Intelligent charging does not display an end of
charge time in the instrument cluster.
Stopping the charging process If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
The charging process can be stopped at any be made via iDrive.
time by removing the charging cable and contin‐ Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next
ued at a later time by connecting the charging charging process.
cable. This enables other consumers to use the
power connection or prevents simultaneous high 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
power from multiple consumers, for example. 2. "Charge immediately once"
For removing the charging cable, refer to
page 215. Functional requirements
▷ Account on the BMW charging portal.
Continuing the charging process ▷ A subscription to the intelligent charging
If the charging process is interrupted, for in‐ service has been obtained.
stance through a temporary power failure, the ▷ Suitable Wallbox.
charging process is automatically continued after
▷ Departure time set, refer to page 221.
the interruption.
▷ Charge current strength setting to highest
level, refer to page 219.
Terminating the charging process
1. Disconnect the charging cable from the vehi‐ Configuring the BMW charging service
cle, refer to page 215.
Use one of the following to configure the
2. Stow the charging cable as required. BMW charging service:
3. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐ ▷ BMW remote app on the smartphone.
gages.
▷ BMW charging portal in the Internet.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Activating intelligent charging
Intelligent charging
Via iDrive:

Concept 1. "My Vehicle"


Intelligent charging can adapt the charging proc‐ 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
ess dynamically via the Internet to the environ‐ 3. "Charge for departure time"
mental conditions, such as the availability of solar
4. "Intelligent charging"
power or time-variable electricity rates. Intelligent
charging is part of BMW's Digital Charging Serv‐
ice.
Displays in the instrument
Further information about the Digital Charging
Service is available on the Internet: cluster
https://charging.bmwgroup.com
The charge state indicator light shows the
charge state of the high-voltage battery in the in‐
strument cluster, if standby state is switched on.

220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is Display Meaning


fully charged.
Flashing: ventilation active.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system
is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process is Flashing: heating active.
shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning
Flashing: cooling active.
Blue plug: charging process active or
completed.
White plug: charging process inter‐
rupted.
Departure time
Running light: animated with active
charging process.
Concept
End of charging time or set departure For optimum range and climate control, the de‐
time. parture time can be set before parking the vehi‐
cle.
Charging progress bar.
Running light: animated with active General information
charging process. With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre‐
heated or precooled during the charging process
DC charging active on a DC charging if climate control is set. Climate control output is
station. reduced during the trip. This increases the range.

Indicator in blue: charged electrical The following settings are possible for departure
range. time:
▷ Climate control for departure time.
Indicator in white: maximum electrical ▷ Planning a one-time departure time.
range.
▷ Planning of up to three regular departure
times per day of the week.
Charging cable connected.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
White clock: departure time set.
be made via iDrive. The departure time change is
White connector: charging procedure a one-off change. Scheduled departure times are
is starting or interrupted. not adjusted. Settings for climate control and
Blue plug: charging process active or charging process are also applied for scheduled
completed. departure times.

Climate control activated at departure


time.
Climate control for departure time
Via iDrive:
Range with Range Extender. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"

221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Setting the departure time Discharged high-voltage and


Level 1 or Level 2 charging:
vehicle battery
Via iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" General information


2. "Plan charging/climate control" In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehi‐
3. "Set departure time" cle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electronics.
4. Set the desired days of the week, if needed.
If the high-voltage battery and the vehicle battery
5. Set the desired time.
are discharged, it is not possible to operate the
Up to three departure times can be set. vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked and returned to opera‐
Activating the departure time tion by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Via iDrive: fied service center or repair shop.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to three departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if the
departure time was ignored three times in a row.

Climate control
General information
The following settings for vehicle air conditioning
are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 179.
The range is reduced if stationary climate
control is activated without a charging cable
connected.
▷ Planned climate control at the set departure
time, refer to page 180.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-
voltage battery may not be fully charged at
departure time.

222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Refueling MOBILITY

Refueling
Vehicle features and options Tank vent
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
Concept
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the The fuel tank is designed for special require‐
selected options or country versions. This also ments that arise from operation with the Range
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Extender.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ General information
served. Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as
a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐
pated before the fuel cap is opened.
General information
Overview
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
The button is located on the driver's floor area.
page 226, prior to refueling.
A sufficient amount of fuel must be added to op‐
Venting the tank
erate the Range Extender. When the Range Ex‐
tender is activated, the current charge state is 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
maintained. The vehicle has a greater range.
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill 2. Press the button to start the pressure
and the selector lever is in position P/N, other‐ equalization.
wise the buildup of pressure may cause the fuel
The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐
nozzle to shut off prematurely.
strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting
can last several minutes.
Safety information When tank venting has finished, a message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel
filler flap is released for opening.
NOTICE 3. Open the fuel filler flap.
With a driving range of less than If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have after tank venting, press the button again.
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to flap even after pressing the button again, un‐
property. Refuel promptly. lock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to
page 224.

223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Refueling

Fuel cap Closing

Opening Warning
Before opening, vent the tank. The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
flap.
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you


clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.

Emergency unlocking
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
The release is located under the hood.

1. Opening the hood, refer to page 245.


2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to


the fuel filler flap.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.

224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Refueling MOBILITY

4. Carefully open the fuel cap. Excess pressure property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and
can build up in the fuel tank from gasoline va‐ charge it simultaneously.
por.

NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

5. Refuel the vehicle as usual. The excess pres‐


sure in the tank may make refueling difficult,
for instance the fuel pump nozzle may shut
off frequently.

Follow the following when


refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.

Safety information

Warning
Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a
risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from
easily flammable materials is not maintained.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to

225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ NOTICE


cific and optional features offered with the series.
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
It also describes features that are not necessarily
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
selected options or country versions. This also
converter is permanently damaged. There is a
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
When using these functions and systems, the
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. ▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Fuel recommendation Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
General information ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
Gasoline the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
General information of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
M100.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
NOTICE
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,
i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
dards: age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
US: ASTM 4806–xx not comply with the minimum quality.
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
Recommended fuel grade
case.
BMW recommends AKI 91.

226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Fuel MOBILITY

Minimum fuel grade


BMW recommends AKI 89.

227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires


Vehicle features and options Tire inflation pressure specifications

This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features that are not necessarily page 229, contains all tire inflation pressure
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
selected options or country versions. This also ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
applies to safety-related functions and systems. values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
When using these functions and systems, the facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
served. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information General information
The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
influence the following:
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
▷ The service life of the tires.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
▷ Road safety. tion pressure.
▷ Driving comfort. The displays of inflation devices may under-read
▷ Driving dynamics. by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
Safety information specifications in the tire inflation pressure
table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
Warning
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. bient temperature.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
the tires are cold, i.e.:
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it ▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ been exceeded.
fore a long trip.

228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least Tire inflation pressure values
2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 228, the intended i3 without Range Extender
tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires. Tire size Pressure specifications in
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four bar/PSI
tires, using a pressure gage, for example. Specifications in
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ bar/PSI with cold
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from tires
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
155/70 R 19 84 Q 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44
onto the tire valves.
M+S A/S Std
After correcting the tire inflation pressure 155/70 R 19 88 Q
M+S XL Std
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
155/70 R 19 84 Q
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Std
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Front: 155/70 R 2.7 / 39 -
Tire fill pressures 19 84 Q M+S A/S
To achieve optimum driving comfort, note the Std
tire inflation pressure specifications in the Tire in‐ Rear: 175/60 R 19 - 3.0 / 44
flation pressure table, refer to page 229, and ad‐ 86 Q M+S A/S
just as needed. Std

Front: 155/60 R 2.7 / 39 -


20 80 Q Std
Rear: 175/55 R 20 - 3.0 / 44
89 Q XL Std

Front: 175/55 R 2.7 / 39 -


20 89 T XL Std

Rear: 195/50 R 20 - 3.0 / 44


93 T XL Std
These tire inflation pressure values can also be
found on the tire inflation pressure label on the
driver's side on the rear door.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

i3 with Range Extender i3s

Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in


bar/PSI bar/PSI

Specifications in Specifications
bar/PSI with cold in bar/PSI with
tires cold tires

155/70 R 19 88 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44 155/70 R 19 88 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44


Q M+S XL Std Q M+S XL Std

Front: 155/70 R 2.7 / 39 - Front: 175/55 R 2.7 / 39 -


19 84 Q M+S A/S 20 89 T XL Std
Std
Rear: 195/50 R - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 175/60 R - 3.0 / 44 20 93 T XL Std
19 86 Q M+S A/S
Std

Front: 155/70 R 2.7 / 39 - Tire identification marks


19 84 Q Std

Rear: 175/60 R - 3.0 / 44


Tire size
19 86 Q Std 245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
Front: 155/60 R 2.7 / 39 -
20 80 Q Std 45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
Rear: 175/55 R - 3.0 / 44
20 89 Q XL Std 18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Front: 175/55 R 2.7 / 39 -
20 89 T XL Std Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Rear: 195/50 R - 3.0 / 44


Maximum tire load
20 93 T XL Std
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver’s side on the
rear door.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.

230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Speed letter Traction AA A B C


Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h Temperature A B C
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
grades.
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h Treadwear
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
Tire Identification Number on the government course as a tire graded 100.
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0119 The relative performance of tires depends upon
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand the actual conditions of their use, however, and
xxx: tire size and tire design may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
0119: tire age differences in road characteristics and climate.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation. Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
Tire age AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
Recommendation
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least conditions on specified government test surfa‐
every 6 years. ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Manufacture date The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
the tire's sidewall. does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
Designation Manufacture date planing, or peak traction characteristics.

DOT … 0119 1st week, 2019 Temperature


The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Quality grades can be found where applicable on generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and when tested under controlled conditions on a
maximum section width. specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
A
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
DOT Quality Grades ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
Treadwear der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels The positions of the wear indicators are marked
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
the minimum required by law. tor.

Warning
Tire damage
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or General information
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
tire failure. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
M+S pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
Winter and all-season tires with better cold low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
weather performance than summer tires. between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
Tire tread file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
Summer tires functions:
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than ▷ Unusual vibrations.
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased ▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
risk of hydroplaning. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Winter tires Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than tions, for instance:
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
▷ Driving over curbs.
winter operation.
▷ Road damage.
Minimum tread depth ▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
while driving, immediately reduce speed and
circumference and have the legally required min‐
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s

232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

service center or another qualified service cen‐ mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐ vehicle type.
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,
but have them replaced.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
Warning negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ on the function of a variety of systems, such as
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross- ity Control. There is a risk of accident. To main‐
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the tain good handling and vehicle response, use
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ only tires with a single tread configuration from
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the
ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐ vehicle recommends that you use wheels and
tions that may damage tires, or drive over them tires that have been recommended by the vehi‐
slowly and carefully. cle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Follow‐
ing tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting Recommended tire brands
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
wheel rim versions for the vehicle. cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
Safety information sidewall.

Warning New tires


Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐ achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
erances despite the same official size rating. time.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ Drive conservatively for the first
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you 200 miles/300 km.
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐

233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Retreaded tires Storing tires

Warning
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Storage
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐ Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
ommend the use of retreaded tires. grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Winter tires Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide Repairing a flat tire
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐ Safety measures
ance as winter tires.
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
Maximum speed of winter tires
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐ setting the parking brake.
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐ ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
able from a dealer's service center or another are in the straight-ahead position and engage
qualified service center or repair shop. the steering wheel lock.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
exceed the permissible maximum speed. hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
Rotating wheels between axles hind a guardrail.
Different wear patterns can occur on the front ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
and rear axles depending on individual driving appropriate distance.
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ Mobility System
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and Concept
correct, if needed.
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
Swapping the front wheels with the rear wheels be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
or vice versa is not permitted on vehicles with To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
different tire or rim dimensions on the front and tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
rear axles.

234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

General information Compressor


▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that 1 Sealant container unlocking
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign 2 Sealant container holder
objects if they are visibly protruding from the 3 Tire pressure gage
tire.
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
5 On/off switch
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
6 Compressor
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM 7 Connector/cable for socket
wheel electronics replaced at the next oppor‐ 8 Connection hose
tunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the Filling the tire with sealant
tire inflation pressure.
Safety information
Overview

Storage DANGER
The Mobility System is located in the storage If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
compartment under the hood. sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
Sealant container tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.

NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
10 minutes.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Filling 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container


1. Shake the sealant container. onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on 6. With standby state or drive-ready state
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ switched on, switch on the compressor.
gages audibly.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill


the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.

236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
inflation pressure side the vehicle.

Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant


5. With standby state or drive-ready state
container switched on, switch on the compressor.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
tainer from the tire valve. not be reached, contact your dealer's service
2. Press the red unlocking device. center or another qualified service center or
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ repair shop.
pressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐ reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not pressor from the tire valve.
reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
inside the vehicle. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ reached
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.

237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Adjustment Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐


1. Stop at a suitable location. tainer of the Mobility System at the next opportu‐
nity.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
i3 without Sport Package: snow
chains
Safety information

Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐ tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
side the vehicle. accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.

Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
2.0 bar. ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor.
Fine-link snow chains
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the button
on the compressor. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
pressor from the tire valve.
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket as road-safe and suitable.
inside the vehicle.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed Use
of 50 mph/80 km/h. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. with the tires of the following size:
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. ▷ 155/70 R 19.

238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ sure in the event of a flat tire is not always neces‐
tions. sary.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in available as accessories from a dealer’s service
incorrect readings. center or another qualified service center or re‐
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ pair shop.
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings. Safety information
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed. DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
Maximum speed with snow chains lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
using snow chains. of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
i3s and vehicles with Sport vehicle and do not start the engine.
Package: snow chains
DANGER
General information
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
certain wheels and tires to be suitable for opera‐
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
tion on the vehicle. Mounting of snow chains on
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
these wheels and tires is not permitted.
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
Safety information supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐ Warning
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐ The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of provided in order to perform a wheel change in
accident or risk of damage to property. Do not the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
mount snow chains. signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
Changing wheels/tires damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
General information breakdown.
When a flat tire kit is used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation pres‐

239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

On a level surface
Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.

Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐ Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle ple a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack. change.

On a slight downhill gradient


Warning
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.

If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐


Warning hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. both the front and rear axles against the rolling
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to direction.
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by Lug bolt lock
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
Securing the vehicle against rolling which matches the coding.

General information Overview


The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
when changing a wheel. to the onboard vehicle tool kit.

240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get


wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.

Screwing on
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
cated at the indicated positions.
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle


▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.

241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.

Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,


and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your
other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐


cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands


vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is


with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.

242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.


2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change


1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.

243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Under the hood

Under the hood


Vehicle features and options selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the

Overview

1 Washer fluid reservoir 3 Climate control coolant reservoir


2 With Range Extender: filler flap emergency 4 Drive coolant reservoir
unlocking

The charging cable compartment in the center is


used for storage of the charging cables.
Moisture can penetrate into the charging cable
compartment, for instance in a vehicle wash.

244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Under the hood MOBILITY

Hood Opening hood


1. Press the release handle and open the hood.
Safety information

Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.

Warning Indicator/warning lights


Body parts can be jammed when opening and When the hood is opened, a Check Control mes‐
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sage is displayed.
sure that the area of movement of hood is clear
during opening and closing. Closing the hood

Warning
Improperly executed work under the hood can
damage components and lead to a safety risk.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. The manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends that work under the hood be per‐
formed only by an authorized BMW i dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
From approx. 16 inches/40 cm height allow to fall
ter or repair shop.
and press again to lock the hook completely.
Make sure you hear the hood engage.

NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.

Opening hood

Unlocking the hood

1. Press button on the remote control


or in the driver's floor area, refer to page 78.

245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Engine oil

Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Checking the oil level
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
General information
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Check the engine oil level with Range Extender
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the warmed up to operating temperature.
selected options or country versions. This also After switching off the Range Extender, wait sev‐
applies to safety-related functions and systems. eral minutes before checking the oil level so that
When using these functions and systems, the the engine oil can collect in the oil pan.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. Checking
1. Park the vehicle in horizontal position in a
safe place.
General information
2. Switch the engine off.
Engine oil consumption depends on the fre‐ 3. Remove the cargo floor panel.
quency of Range Extender use. Therefore, regu‐
larly check the engine oil level after refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to 4. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.

246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Engine oil MOBILITY

5. After approx. 5, minutes, remove the dip stick


and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or
similar.

6. Carefully insert the dipstick up to the stop in


the measuring tube, and pull it back out.
The engine oil level must be between the two
marks of the dipstick.

Adding or changing engine oil


Have engine oil added or changed by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop if necessary.

247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Coolant

Coolant
Vehicle features and options or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Coolant reservoir
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also The vehicle has two coolant reservoirs that are
applies to safety-related functions and systems. located under the hood.
When using these functions and systems, the
To ensure the operational reliability of the vehi‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cle, always check the coolant level of both cool‐
served.
ant reservoirs.
Opening the hood, refer to page 245.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
The vehicle's cooling circuits are filled with differ‐
ent types of coolant. Do not mix the different
types of coolant.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop. 1 Climate control coolant reservoir
2 Drive coolant reservoir
Safety information
Coolant level
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system Climate control coolant reservoir
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling Checking
system with the engine cooled down. 1. Allow the air conditioner to cool down.
2. Opening the hood.

Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes

248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Coolant MOBILITY

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly Drive coolant reservoir
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate. Checking
1. Allow the drive to cool down.
2. Opening the hood.
3. Check the coolant level.
The marks are on the side of the coolant res‐
ervoir. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks.

Adding
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 1. Allow the air conditioner to cool down.
5. Check the coolant level. 2. Opening the hood.
The coolant level is correct if it lies between 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
the minimum and maximum marks in the res‐ counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
ervoir. sure to dissipate.
6. Close the lid.

Adding
1. Allow the air conditioner to cool down.
2. Opening the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.


5. Slowly add coolant up to the specified level;
do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have cause of the coolant loss eliminated by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as quickly as
possible.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. Slowly add coolant up to the specified level; Disposal
do not overfill.
6. Close the lid. Comply with the relevant environmental
7. Have cause of the coolant loss eliminated by protection regulations when disposing of
a dealer’s service center or another qualified coolant and coolant additives.
service center or repair shop as quickly as
possible.

249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Maintenance

Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Condition Based Service CBS
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
Concept
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Sensors and special algorithms take into account
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
selected options or country versions. This also these to calculate the need for maintenance.
applies to safety-related functions and systems. The system makes it possible to adapt the
When using these functions and systems, the amount of maintenance corresponding to your
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ user profile.
served.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
BMW maintenance system page 123, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐
Service data in the remote control
tional reliability of the vehicle. Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. The serv‐
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐
ice center can read this data out and suggest a
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
separately. Further information is available from a control with which the vehicle was driven most
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ recently.
ice center or repair shop.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
Safety information was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
DANGER
update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
Improperly performed work, in particular main‐ dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
tenance and repair on the high-voltage system, sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of in‐ activated-charcoal filter.
jury, fire and danger to life.
Have work on the vehicle, in particular mainte‐
nance and repair, performed by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.

250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Maintenance MOBILITY

Service and Warranty ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
Information Booklet for US poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
models and Warranty and board Diagnosis.

Service Guide Booklet for


Canadian models Position

Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐


mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained. Located on the driver's side is an OBD socket for
reading the vehicle data.

Socket for OBD Onboard On vehicles with Range Extender, additional


components are checked that are critical for its
Diagnosis emissions mix.

General information Emissions


Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger Applies to vehicles with Range Extender.
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket ▷ The warning light lights up:
before locking the vehicle. Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Safety information ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
NOTICE This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐ Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
junction with specialized equipment to check tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ ously damage emission control components,
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ in particular the catalytic converter.
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐

251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Replacing components

Replacing components
Vehicle features and options 3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.

Wiper blades 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of


removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Safety information
Replacing the rear wiper blade
NOTICE 1. Fold up the wiper arm.
The window may sustain damage if the wiper 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.

Replacing the front wiper blades


1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms, refer to page 112.
2. Fold up the wipers. 3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the way
so that it pops out of the holder.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder un‐
til you hear it snap into place.
5. Fold the wipers in.

252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Replacing components MOBILITY

Light/bulb replacement droplets in the light, have the headlights


checked.

General information
Vehicle battery
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The battery
to vehicle safety. supplies the onboard electronics with energy.
All headlights and lights are made using LED For information about the high-voltage system,
technology. refer to page 212.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have the relevant work carried out a dealer’s Maintenance
service center or another qualified service center The battery is maintenance-free.
or repair shop. More information about the battery can be re‐
Follow the safety information, refer to page 253. quested from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
The lights use light-emitting diodes installed be‐ Replacing the vehicle battery
hind the cover as a light source. These light-
emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers General information
and are officially designated as Class 1 light- The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
emitting diodes. that you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
Safety information the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐
able without restriction and any Check Control
messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐
Warning tures will disappear.
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not Safety information
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
Headlight glass damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
Condensation can form on the inside of the functions. There is a risk of an accident and
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ are compatible with your vehicle type should be
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐
light glass does not need to be changed. patible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water

253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Replacing components

Charging the vehicle battery Fuses


General information
Safety information
For charging a discharged battery, refer to
page 222.
Warning
Safety information Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
NOTICE
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
Non-compatible external chargers can damage of another color or amperage rating.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only loading devices that
are compatible with your vehicle and that are Accessing the fuses
below the maximum charge voltage should be
The fuses are located in the passenger floor area
used to charge your vehicle. Information on
under the dashboard.
compatible chargers is available at your dealer’s
service center. 1. To open, loosen screws, arrows 1.

Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sun protection: initialize
the system. 2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.
Proceed in the reverse order to install.
Disposing of old batteries Information on the fuse types and locations, as
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
er’s service center or another qualified found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point. Replacing fuses
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
that it does not tip over during transport. fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.

254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Storage
The first-aid kit is located at the rear of the cargo
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ area.
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the BMW Roadside Assistance
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
Concept
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if
served. assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.

Hazard warning flashers General information


In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufac‐
turer.
There are various ways of making contact.
▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 121.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.

The button is located in the center console. Requirements


The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
ard warning flashers are activated. version with Intelligent emergency call or
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
Warning triangle ▷ Standby state is switched on.

The warning triangle is located in the hood. Starting


If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
First-aid kit port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
Via iDrive:
General information 1. "ConnectedDrive"
Some of the articles have a limited service life. 2. "BMW Assist"
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐ 3. "BMW i Roadside Assistance"
larly and replace any expired items promptly.

255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
the manufacture is established. cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
A telephone number is displayed, if needed. tions.
Select to dial the telephone number on a
connected mobile phone. Overview

Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically.

Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help
enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle SOS button in the roofliner.
via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it Functional requirements
through the Service Specialist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. ▷ The ignition is switched on.
2. Set the parking brake. ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
3. Control Display is switched on. emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
4. "Teleservice Help" the vehicle has been activated.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored


Automatic triggering
for specific functions.
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
informed.
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
ton.
Emergency Request
Manual triggering
Intelligent emergency call 1. Tap the cover.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
Concept
on the button illuminates green.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
gency Request has been initiated.
tem or manually.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
General information Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐
the voice connection has been established.
tion with the BMW Response Center.

256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to General information


the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
After an accident, comply with the following
lished.
safety precautions with regard to the high-volt‐
The BMW Response Center then makes age system:
contact with you and takes further steps to
▷ Secure the crash site.
help you.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
Response Center can take further steps to
equipped with a high-voltage system.
help you under certain circumstances.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
parking brake, and switch off the standby
sponse Center which serves to determine the
state and drive-ready state.
necessary rescue measures. For instance,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can be ▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
established. ▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐ high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the safe distance from the vehicle.
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
Jump-starting
gency Request.
General information
Have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
What to do after an accident fied service center or repair shop perform the
jump start.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to an DANGER
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ Contact with live components can lead to an
ger to life. After an accident, do not touch any electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
high-voltage components such as orange col‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that
ored high-voltage cables or parts that are in are under voltage.
contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

Towing
Warning
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive.
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids es‐
Transporting the vehicle
caping from the high-voltage battery.
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Safety information Towing other vehicles

NOTICE General information


The vehicle can be damaged when towing the Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of ing on local regulations.
damage to property. The vehicle should only be If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
transported on a loading platform. the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.

Pushing the vehicle Safety information


To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, push it for a short distance at a speed
Warning
of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
page 103.
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
Tow truck There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
NOTICE side on both vehicles.
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
and securing it. tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
There is a risk of damage to property. lowing:
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow around corners.
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.

Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.

258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the Screw thread for tow fitting
vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Tow fitting

General information

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to


push it out.

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried


in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or


rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is located in the storage compart‐
ment under the hood.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.

Safety information

NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.

259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Care

Care
Vehicle features and options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ When washing, water can get into the open
cific and optional features offered with the series. charging socket. There is a risk of damage to
It also describes features that are not necessarily property. Close the charging socket flap while
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the washing.
selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the Steam blaster and high-pressure
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ washer
served.
Safety information

Washing the vehicle


NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
General information
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
in the area below the windshield when the hood risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
is raised. distance and do not spray too long continu‐
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the high-pressure washer.
vehicle.

Safety information Distances and temperature


▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

Warning ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,


seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. High voltage is present at the ▷ Minimum distance from the charging socket
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.
danger to life.
Have work on the charging connection, for in‐
Automatic vehicle washes
stance cleaning, performed by an authorized
BMW i dealer's service center or another quali‐ Safety information
fied service center or repair shop.
NOTICE
Water can penetrate in the windshield area due
to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid high-pressure
washers.

260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Care MOBILITY

Headlights
NOTICE Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
damage to property. Follow the following in‐ from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
structions: water.
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
those that use soft brushes in order to scraper.
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails After washing the vehicle
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
the chassis.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to be reduced. The heat generated during braking
avoid damage to tires and rims. dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to them against corrosion.
the exterior mirrors. Completely remove all residues on the windows,
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
antenna breaking off. to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem. Vehicle care

Driving into a vehicle wash Vehicle care products

General information General information


In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll The vehicle manufacturer recommends using
freely. care and cleaning products for BMW i. Suitable
care products are available from a dealer’s serv‐
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 103. ice center or another qualified service center or
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in repair shop.
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A Safety information
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Warning
Driving out of a vehicle wash Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐ gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
cle. risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Activate drive-ready state. For activating drive- tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
ready state, refer to page 101. structions on the container.

261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Care

Vehicle paint Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐


cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
General information more visible.

Regular care contributes to driving safety and Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
value retention. Environmental influences in grease will gradually break down the protective
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ layer of the leather surface.
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and Upholstery material care
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, General information
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered cleaner.
or discolored. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
Safety information with a suitable cleaning agent.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
Warning large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint terial vigorously.
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. Safety information
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Have paintwork or paintwork NOTICE
repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sen‐
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
sors performed by a dealer’s service center or
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
another qualified service center or repair shop
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
only.
fasteners are closed.

Matte finish
Caring for special components
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Leather care
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe instructions.
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
face. nents, such as the brake disc.
To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries
roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.

262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Care MOBILITY

Chrome surfaces ▷ Carbon parts in the car's interior.


Carefully clean components such as the radiator Clean with a microfiber cloth.
grille or door handles with plenty of water, possi‐ Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
bly with shampoo added, particularly when they
Do not soak the roofliner.
have been exposed to road salt.

Safety belts
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only Warning
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage safety belts.
or noises.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
Fine wood parts thus have a negative impact on safety.

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
nents only with a suitable care product. belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
Kenaf they are dry.
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers, for in‐
stance in the door trims, using suitable care Carpets and floor mats
products.
Warning
Plastic components Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
NOTICE There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
with water, if needed.
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
Plastic components are e.g.:
for instance for cleaning.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner. Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
▷ Light lenses. rior for cleaning.
▷ Instrument cluster cover. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or an upholstery cleaner.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior. forth in the direction of travel only.

263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
MOBILITY Care

Sensor/camera lenses Safety information


To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ NOTICE
gent.
The high-voltage battery can be damaged by
excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage
Displays/screens to property. Before storing the vehicle for an
extended period, ensure that the high-voltage
NOTICE battery is fully charged. During the idle period,
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any connect the vehicle to a charging station at a
kind can damage the surface of displays and compatible charging location. If necessary, the
screens. There is a risk of damage to property. high-voltage battery will be charged automati‐
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. cally. Make sure that charging is carried out.
Regularly check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
NOTICE
prox. 80 %.
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long idle times and long-term vehicle


storage

Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park the
vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully
charged, if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if
the electric range is less than 6 mls/10 km.
With storage times of up to three months, if pos‐
sible plug the vehicle into a compatible power
source or park it with the high-voltage battery as
fully charged as possible.

General information
Your dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can advise you on
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
longer than three months.
Follow the instructions for discharging the high-
voltage battery, refer to page 201.

264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Care MOBILITY

265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 268
Appendix ................................................................................................... 271
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 272

267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Technical data

Technical data
Vehicle features and options selected options or country versions. This also
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the

General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐

Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof

BMW i3

Width with mirrors in/mm 80.3/2,039

Width without mirrors in/mm 69.9/1,775

Height in/mm 62.9/1,598

Length in/mm 158.3/4,020

Wheelbase in/mm 101.2/2,570

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 32.3/9.9

BMW i3s

Width with mirrors in/mm 80.3/2,039

Width without mirrors in/mm 70.5/1,791

268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Technical data REFERENCE

BMW i3s

Height in/mm 62.6/1,590

Length in/mm 158.1/4,016

Wheelbase in/mm 101.2/2,570

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 33.8/10.3

Weights

BMW i3 (120 Ah)

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,915/1,776

Load lbs/kg 816/370

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,742/790

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000

BMW i3s (120 Ah)

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,915/1,776

Load lbs/kg 816/370

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,742/790

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000

BMW i3 (120 Ah with Range Extender)

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,968/1,800

Load lbs/kg 628/285

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,753/795

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,304/1,045

BMW i3s (120 Ah with Range Extender)

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,968/1,800

Load lbs/kg 628/285

269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Technical data

BMW i3s (120 Ah with Range Extender)

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,753/795

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,304/1,045

Capacities

With optional Range Extender

Fuel tank, approx.

BMW i3 US gal/liters 2.3/8.7

BMW i3s US gal/liters 2.3/8.7

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer


to page 226.

270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Appendix REFERENCE

Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.

271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
A Approach control warning with city light braking
function 143
A/C button, see Air conditioning 177 Approved axle load 269
ABS, Antilock Brake System 150 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐ tertainment, Communication 8
tion 154 Artificial engine noise 106
Accelerator pedal positions 105 Ashtray 187
Accessories and parts 10 Assistance when driving off 153
Acoustic pedestrian protection 106 AUTO intensity 178
AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging Automatic climate control 176
cable 214 Automatic cornering adjustment 94
Activated-charcoal filter 179 Automatic cruise control with Stop & Go func‐
Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function tion 154
ACC 154 Automatic Curb Monitor 94
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐ Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
play 148 bags 136
Adjustments, steering wheel 95 Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage sys‐
Advance climate control, see Stationary climate tem 67
control 179 Automatic headlight control 130
After washing vehicle 261 Automatic locking 83
Airbags 134 Automatic recirculated-air control 178
Airbags, indicator and warning light 136 Automatic unlocking 83
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Automatic vehicle wash 260
mode 174, 178 AUTO program, automatic climate control 177
Air conditioner 173 AUTO program, intensity 178
Air conditioning 174, 177 Auto washing 260
Air distribution, manual 175, 178 Average consumption 126
Air flow, air conditioner 175 Average speed 126
Air flow, automatic climate control 178 Axle loads, weights 269
Air pressure, tires 228
Air vents, see Ventilation 179 B
Alarm system 83
Alarm, unintentional 84 Back doors 76
All-season tires, see Winter tires 234 Backrest, seats 88
Ambient light 133 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 255
Antifreeze, washer fluid 113 Battery, 12 volt 253
Antilock Brake System, ABS 150 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 253
Anti-slip control, see DSC 150 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 72
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 240 Battery state indicator 116
Battery, vehicle 253

272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Being towed, see Towing 257 Cargo area, storage compartments 196
Belts, safety belts 90 Cargo cover 189
Bluetooth connection 55 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 190
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Cargo, stowing and securing 205
Entertainment, Communication 8 Cargo straps 205
BMW 360° ELECTRIC Portal, see Intelligent Carpet, care 263
charging 220 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, tem 201
Entertainment and Communication 8 CBS Condition Based Service 250
BMW eDRIVE 64 Center armrest 194
BMW Homepage 8 Center console 38
BMW Internet page 8 Central Information Display (CID), see Control
BMW maintenance system 250 Display 42
Body work, see Working on the vehicle 67 Central locking system 75
Brake assistant 150 Central screen, see Control Display 42
Brake discs, break-in 200 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9
Brake force display 148 Changing wheels 239
Brake lights, brake force display 148 Changing wheels/tires 233
Brake pads, break-in 200 Charge state indicator, high-voltage battery 116
Braking, information 202 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 212
Breakdown assistance 255 Charging cable storage 215
Break-in 200 Charging cable, unlocking manually 217
Brightness of Control Display 52 Charging screen 115
Bulb replacement 253 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 212
Bulbs and lights 253 Charging, see Vehicle charging 212
Button, RES 157 Charging socket flap, unlocking manually 216
Button, Start/Stop 100 Charging status, see Display of the charging sta‐
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 257 tus 218
Charging the vehicle 212
C Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charging 212
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, ber 14
Entertainment, Communication 8 Check Control 118
California Proposition 65 Warning 10 Check engine oil 246
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Check oil level 246
gent Safety 142 Children, seating position 96
Camera-based cruise control 154 Children, transporting safely 96
Camera lenses, care 264 Child restraint system 96
Camera, rearview camera 166 Child restraint system LATCH 98
Care, displays 264 Child restraint systems, mounting 97
Care, vehicle 261 Child seat, mounting 97
Care, washing the vehicle 260 Child seats 96
Cargo 204 Chrome parts, care 263
Cargo area 189 Cigarette lighter 187
Cargo area, enlarging 190 Cleaning, displays 264
Cargo area, loading 205 Climate control 173, 176

273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Clothes hooks 196 Cruise control 160


Coasting 105 Cruise control, active with Stop & Go func‐
Combination switch, see Turn signals 109 tion 154
Combination switch, see Wiper system 109 Cruise control with distance control, see Cam‐
Comfort Access 76 era-based cruise control ACC 154
COMFORT program, driving dynamics 152 Cruise control without distance control, see
Compartments in the doors 195 Cruise control 160
Compass 185 Cruising range 122
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 54 Current consumption 126
Compressor 234
Computer, see Onboard Computer 126 D
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Damage, tires 232
Condensation on windows 175, 179 Data protection, settings 53
Condensation under the vehicle 203 Data, technical 268
Condition Based Service CBS 250 Date 51
Confirmation signal 83 Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation 146
Connect device 54 Daytime running lights 131
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ DCC, see Cruise control 160
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 175, 179
Connecting mobile phone 54 Deleting personal data 53
Connecting smartphone 54 Deletion of personal data 53
Connecting telephone 54 Departure times, stationary climate control 180
Connections 54 Device list 54
Consumption, see Average consumption 126 Digital clock 122
Consumption, see Current consumption 126 Digital compass 185
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Dimensions 268
Entertainment, Communication 8 Dimmable exterior mirrors 94
Contact with water, high-voltage system 67 Dimmable interior mirror 95
Container for washer fluid 113 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 109
Control Display 42 Display and input 40
Control Display, settings 50 Display for performance and energy recov‐
Controller 42 ery 116
Control systems, driving stability 150 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 132
Convenient closing with the remote control 71 Displays 114
Convenient opening with the remote control 71 Displays, care 264
Coolant 248 Displays, eDRIVE system 115
Coolant temperature 121 Displays, high-voltage system 115
Cooling, maximum 177 Disposal, coolant 249
Cooling system 248 Disposal, vehicle battery 254
Cornering light 131 Distance control, see PDC 163
Corrosion on brake discs 203 Divided screen view, split screen 41
Cosmetic mirror 187 Door key, see Remote control 74
Couple device, see Pair device 54 Drive display 116
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71 Drive-off assistant 153
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 150

274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 142 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Drive-ready state in detail 101 Entertainment, Communication 8
Drive-ready state, switching off 104 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 224
Drive-ready state, switching on 101 Emergency Request 256
Driver profiles 80 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 81 tance 255
Driver profiles, importing profiles 81 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 217
Driving Dynamics Control 151 Emergency unlocking, charging socket flap 216
Driving in detail 104 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 104
Driving instructions, break-in 200 Energy control 126
Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive system 200 Energy recovery, displaying 116
Driving mode 151 Energy recovery, driving stability control sys‐
Driving notes, general 201 tems 150
Driving on racetracks 203 Engine coolant 248
Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 101 Engine noise, artificial 106
Driving stability control systems 150 Engine oil 246
Driving, Start/Stop button 100 Engine oil, adding 247
Driving style analysis 209 Engine start, jump-starting 257
Driving tips 201 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
Drying air, see Air conditioning 174, 177 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 150 tion 8
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 151 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 munication 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 150 Entering a vehicle wash 260
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 151 Equipment, interior 182
Error displays, see Check Control 118
E ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 150
Exchanging wheels/tires 233
ECO PRO 207 Exhaust gas system 201
ECO PRO+ 207 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 201
ECO PRO display 207 Exiting a vehicle wash 260
ECO PRO driving mode 207 Expanding range with Range Extender 106
ECO PRO Driving style analysis 209 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 94
ECO PRO mode 207 Exterior mirrors 93
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction 208 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 94
eDRIVE drive system, driving instructions 200 External start 257
eDRIVE, electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 65 External temperature display 122
eDrive system, at a glance 64 External temperature warning 122
eDRIVE system, displays 115 Eyes for securing cargo 205
Efficiency display, ECO PRO 208
Electric driving 104 F
Electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 65
Electric range 122 Failure message, see Check Control 118
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 150 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 84
Fan, see Air flow 175, 178

275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 90 G


Filter, see Microfilter 175
Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil‐ Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
ter 179 Remote Control 182
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations Gasoline 226
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook General driving notes 201
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ General settings 50
tion 8 Glare shield 187
Fine wood, care 263 Glass sunroof, electric 86
First-aid kit 255 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 87
Flat tire, changing wheels 239 Glove compartment 193
Flat tire message, FTM 141 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 51
Flat tire message, TPM 139 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 140 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Flat tire, repairing 234 Gross vehicle weight, approved 269
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 137
Flat tire warning light, FTM 141 H
Flat tire warning light, TPM 139
Flooding 202 Handbrake, see Parking brake 107
Floor carpet, care 263 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 183
Floor mats, care 263 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Fold-away position, wiper 112 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Fold back rear seat backrests 190 Hazard warning flashers 255
Foot brake 202 Head airbags 135
For Your Own Safety 9 Headlight control, automatic 130
Front airbags 134 Headlight courtesy delay feature 130
Front armrest 194 Headlight flasher 109
Front beverage holder, front cup holder 194 Headlight glass 253
Front bottle holder, see Front cup holder 194 Headlights, care 261
Front can holder, see Front cup holder 194 Head restraints, front 91
Front cup holder 194 Head restraints, rear 92
Front holder for beverages 194 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 205
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ Height, vehicle 268
vation 136 High-beam Assistant 131
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 137 High beams 109
Front seats 88 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 140 tant 131
Fuel 226 High-voltage battery, charge state indicator 116
Fuel cap 224 High-voltage battery, discharge 201
Fuel filler flap 224 High-voltage battery, heated 107
Fuel gauge, Range Extender 121 High-voltage battery, heavily discharged 106
Fuel quality 226 High-voltage system, automatic deactivation 67
Fuel recommendation 226 High-voltage system, contact with water 67
Fuel, tank capacity 270 High-voltage system, displays 115
Fuse 254 High-voltage system, safety 67
Hills 203

276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 153 Intensity, AUTO program 178
Hold function 108 Interior equipment 182
Homepage 8 Interior lights 132
Hood 78 Interior lights during unlocking 71
Horn 36 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72
Hot exhaust gas system 201 Interior mirror 93
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 95
Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior mirror, compass 185
Hydroplaning 202 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 95
Interior motion sensor 84
I Internet connection 57
Internet hotspot 57
Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐ Internet page 8
ing 122 Interval display, service requirements 123
Icy roads, see External temperature warning 122 Interval mode 110
Identification marks, tires 230 In the vicinity of the center console 38
Identification number, see Vehicle identification In the vicinity of the roofliner 39
number 14 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 36
iDrive 40 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi‐
Ignition key, see Remote control 74 cle 62
Illuminant replacement 253
Important under the hood 244 J
Increasing the range 206
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐ Jacking points for the vehicle jack 241
trol 118 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 86
Indicator light, see Check Control 118 Jam protection system, windows 85
Individual air distribution 175, 178 Jump-starting 257
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 80
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless K
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Kenaf, care 263
Inflation pressure, tires 228 Key/remote control 74
Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 140 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 76
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 126 Key, see Remote control 70
Information 8 Knee airbag 135
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 138
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 141 L
Input and display 40
Instrument cluster 114 Label on recommended tires 233
Instrument lighting 132 Language, on the Control Display 50
Integrated key 74 Lashing eyes 205
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 62 LATCH child restraint fixing system 98
Intelligent charging 220 Leather, care 262
Intelligent emergency call 256 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 253
Intelligent Safety 142 Length, vehicle 268
Intended use 9 Level 1 charging 219

277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Level 1 charging cable 214 Maximum cooling 177


Level 2 charging 219 Maximum speed, display 124
Level 2 charging cable 214 Maximum speed, winter tires 234
Light 129 Measurement, units of 51
Light-alloy wheels, care 262 Medical kit 255
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 253 Menu in instrument cluster 125
Lighting 129 Menus 43
Light replacement, see Bulb replacement 253 Menus, operating, iDrive 40
Light switch 129 Messages 52
List of all messages 52 Messages, see Check Control 118
Load 205 Microfilter 175, 179
Loading 204 Minimum tread, tires 232
Loading position 190 Mirror 93
Location, vehicle position 51 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
Locking, automatic 83 cle 202
Locking, see Opening and Closing 70 Mobility System 234
Locking, settings 82 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Longer idle phases 264 Safety 9
Long idle times and long-term vehicle stor‐ Moisture in headlight 253
age 264 Monitor, see Control Display 42
Long-term vehicle storage 264 Mounting of child restraint systems 97
Low beams 129 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tant 131 tion 8
Lug bolt lock 240 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
M Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
Maintaining charge state, see Range Ex‐ igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
tender 106
Maintenance 250 N
Maintenance requirements 250
Maintenance, service requirements 123 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Maintenance system, BMW 250 Entertainment and Communication 8
Make-up mirror 187 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 91
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 118 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 92
Manual air distribution 175, 178 Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 262
Manual air flow 175, 178 New wheels and tires 233
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 224 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐ Entertainment, Communication 8
trol 164
Manual operation, rearview camera 167 O
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 251
Master key, see Remote control 74 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 251
Matte finish 262 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 168

278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Pedestrian protection 106


grade 226 Performance display 116
Odometer 122 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 80
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Plastic, care 263
tertainment and Communication 8 PostCrash 148
Oil 246 Power failure 254
Oil, adding 247 Power sunroof, glass 86
Oil change interval, service requirements 123 Power windows 85
Old batteries, disposal 254 Pressure, tires 228
Onboard Computer 126 Pressure warning FTM, tires 140
Onboard literature, printed 62 Printed onboard literature 62
On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 255 Profiles, see Driver profiles 80
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 45
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Protective function, glass sunroof 86
tion 8 Protective function, windows 85
Opening and closing 70 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 42
Operating concept, iDrive 40
Operating via iDrive 43 Q
Operation with the Controller 43
Optional equipment 9 Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging ca‐
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air con‐ ble 214
trol 178 Quick charging, see Level 2 charging 219
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐
ture 121 R
Owner's Manual media 62
Owner's Manual, printed 62 Racetrack operation 203
Radiator fluid 248
P Radio-operated key, see Remote control 74
Radio-operated remote control, see Remote
Paint, vehicle 262 control 70
Pair device 54 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 84 tertainment and Communication 8
Panic mode 84 Rain sensor 110
Parallel parking assistant 169 Range Extender, expanding range 106
Park Distance Control PDC 163 Range Extender, fuel gauge 121
Parked vehicle, condensation 203 Range Extender, maintenance run 106
Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary climate Range Extender, use 106
control 179 Ratchet straps 205
Parking aid, see PDC 163 Rear beverage holder, rear cup holder 195
Parking assistant 169 Rear bottle holder, see Rear cup holder 195
Parking brake 107 Rear can holder, see Rear Cup holder 195
Parking lights 129 Rear cup holder 195
Parts and accessories 10 Rear doors 76
Passenger's side mirror, tilting downward 94 Rear holder for beverages 195
Pathway lines, rearview camera 167 Rearview camera 166
PDC Park Distance Control 163 Rear window defroster 175, 179

279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Rear window wiper, operation 111 Safety belts, care 263


Recirculated-air filter 179 Safety of the high-voltage system 67
Recirculated-air mode 174, 178 Safety systems, airbags 134
Recommended fuel grade 226 Screen, see Control Display 42
Recommended tire brands 233 Sealant 234
Refueling 223 Seat heating, front 90
Remaining range 122 Seating position for children 96
Remote control/key 74 Seats, front 88
Remote control, additional 73 Securing cargo 205
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ Selection list in instrument cluster 125
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Sensors, care 264
cation 8 Service and warranty 11
Remote control, loss 73 Service requirements, Condition Based Service
Remote control, malfunction 73 CBS 250
Remote control, opening/closing 70 Service requirements, display 123
Remote control, universal 182 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ tion 8
tion 8 SET button, see Camera-based cruise control
Replacing wheels/tires 233 ACC 154
Reporting safety malfunctions 15 SET button, see Cruise control 160
RES button 157 Settings, locking/unlocking 82
RES button, see Camera-based cruise control Settings on the Control Display 50
ACC 154 Side airbags 134
RES button, see Cruise control 160 Signaling, horn 36
Reserve warning, see Range 122 Signals when unlocking 83
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 138 Sitting safely 88
Retreaded tires 234 Size 268
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐ Slide/tilt glass roof 86
tance 255 Smallest turning radius 268
Roadside parking lights 129 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 183 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
RON recommended fuel grade 226 cation 8
Roofliner 39 SMS text message, supplementary 121
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Snow chains 238
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Socket 187
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 251
tertainment, Communication 8 Software update 60
Rubber components, care 263 SOS button 256
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
S gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Speed, average 126
Safe braking 202 Speed Limit Info 124
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 127
passenger seat 91 Speed limits, display 124
Safety belts 90 Speed warning 127

280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Split screen 41 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐


SPORT program, driving dynamics 152 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Stability control systems 150 Temperature, air conditioner 174
Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging Temperature, automatic climate control 176
cable 214 Temperature display for external tempera‐
Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 219 ture 122
Standard equipment 9 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 83
Standby state 101 Tilt alarm sensor 84
Start/Stop button 100 Time 50
Stationary climate control 179 Tire damage 232
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Tire identification marks 230
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Tire inflation pressure 228
Status control display, tires 138 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM 140
Status information, iDrive 40 Tire pressure 228
Status of Owner's Manual 9 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 137
Status, vehicle 128 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 234
Steering wheel, adjusting 95 Tires, changing 233
Storage compartments 193 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 234
Storage compartments, locations 193 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 228
Storage, tires 234 Tire tread 232
Storing the charging cable, see Storage 215 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
Storing the vehicle 264 tainment and Communication 8
Stowing and securing cargo 205 Total vehicle weight 269
Suitable devices 54 Touchpad 45
Suitable mobile phones 54 Towing 257
Summer tires, tread 232 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 137
Sun visor 187 Traction control 151
Supplementary SMS text message 121 TRACTION, driving dynamics 151
Switch for driving dynamics 151 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Switching off, drive-ready state 104 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Switching on, drive-ready state 101 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 104
Switch, see Cockpit 36 Transporting children safely 96
Symbols 8 Tread, tires 232
Trip computer 127
T Triple turn signal activation 109
Trip odometer 122
Tailgate opening 79 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 122
Tailgate via remote control 72 Turning radius 268
Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 223 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 167
Tank vent 223 Turn signal, indicator light 120
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9 Turn signals, operation 109
Technical data 268 TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, tertainment, Communication 8
Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8

281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

U W

Unintentional alarm 84 Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐


Units of measurement 51 trol 118
Universal remote control 182 Warning displays, see Check Control 118
Unlocking, automatic 83 Warning messages, see Check Control 118
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 70 Warning triangle 255
Unlocking, settings 82 Warranty 10
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Washer fluid 113
Upholstery care 262 Washer nozzles, windshield 111
USB connection 56 Washer system 109
USB interface, general information 188 Washing the vehicle 260
USB port, see USB interface 188 Water, high-voltage system 67
Use, intended 9 Water on roads 202
Using a smartphone via voice activation 47 Weights 269
Using Range Extender 106 Welcome lights 130
Welcome lights during unlocking 71
V What to do after an accident 257
Wheelbase, vehicle 268
Vanity mirror 187 Wheel cleaner 262
Vehicle battery 253 Wheels, changing 233
Vehicle battery, replacing 253 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 228
Vehicle, break-in 200 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 140
Vehicle care 261 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 137
Vehicle care products 261 Width, vehicle 268
Vehicle features and options 9 WiFi connection 57
Vehicle identification number 14 Windows, powered 85
Vehicle jack 241 Windshield washer fluid 113
Vehicle key, see Remote control 70, 74 Windshield washer nozzles 111
Vehicle paint 262 Windshield washer system 109
Vehicle position, vehicle location 51 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 109
Vehicle status 128 Winter storage, care 264
Vehicle wash 260 Winter tires, suitable tires 234
Vehicle wash, automatic 260 Winter tires, tread 232
Vehicle, washing 260 Wiper 109
Ventilation 179 Wiper blades, replacing 252
Venting, see Stationary climate control 179 Wiper fluid 113
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14 Wiper, fold-away position 112
Voice activation system 47 Wiper system 109
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐ Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
cation 8 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wood, care 263
Word match concept, navigation 40

282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Working on the body, see Working on the vehi‐


cle 67
Working on the high-voltage system, see Work‐
ing on the vehicle 67
Working under the hood 245

283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19
*BL277934400E*
01402779344 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19


The Ultimate
Driving Machine®

BMW i DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.


Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

*BL277934400E*
01402779344 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402779344 - II/19

You might also like